You are on page 1of 291

TM

NEW SOUTH WALES


MK4/5XR VIDEO GAMING MACHINE
SERVICE MANUAL
AM-1121032-01

JUBILEE GAMING TECHNOLOGY, A DIVISION OF ARISTOCRAT LEISURE INDUSTRIES PTY LTD (ACN 001 660 715) 71 Longueville Road, Lane Cove NSW 2066, Australia. Telephone: (612) 9413 6300 PO Box 808, Lane Cove NSW 1595, Australia. Fax: (612) 9420 1326

Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd 2000 The gaming machine described in this document may be covered by patents and registered designs. This document is protected by copyright. No part of it may be reproduced or copied without the written permission of Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd, Australia. This document is not for use in countries where gaming machines are prohibited by law. Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd reserves the right to change, without notice, the design or specification of the gaming machine covered by this document. Additional information is available from time to time in the form of technical bulletins. New editions of this document may change its contents.

WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference, in which case the user may be required to take adequate action.

CAUTION
All functions of the machine are controlled by complex electronics. Unqualified personnel must not interfere with any mechanisms or controls as this may permanently damage the machine and lead to expensive repairs or component replacement, and will render the warranty void.
Important Safety Information

This document contains important information about the use of the equipment and hazards involved in owning and operating the equipment to which it relates. The equipment can be very hazardous if used other than in accordance with this document.
Inform Yourself and Your Staff You must read this document before using the equipment or opening any part of the equipment. Ensure your staff do too. The equipment itself is marked with important warning labels detailing dangers. Check for warning labels whenever opening any part of the equipment. Read and comply with all warning labels you see when operating or opening the equipment. Under no circumstances remove or alter any warning label. Be Careful If you dont follow the directions in this manual and on warning labels you increase the risk of the following things occurring: serious personal injury, including electrocution and amputation. Unless you are a trained technician, tampering with the machine can kill you. serious damage to the equipment; serious damage to other equipment; serious damage to the premises housing the equipment;

II

Introduction

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Record of Amendments

Record of Amendments
Amendment Number Amendment Date Insertion Date Your Initials

Introduction

III

Record of Amendments

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Amendment Number

Amendment Date

Insertion Date

Your Initials

IV

Introduction

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

Aristocrat Jubilee MK4/5XR Manuals


Operator Manual Primarily intended for operators of Aristocrat Mk4/5XR Video Gaming Machines. The Operator Manual: gives a general overview of the hardware and software provides procedures for daily operations and simple maintenance.

Service Manual Primarily intended for service technicians. The Service Manual: gives a general overview of the hardware and software provides instructions for installation and fault finding describes in detail each of the major components of the machine.

Parts Catalogue Primarily intended for operators and service technicians. It enables operators and service technicians to order machine parts. The Parts Catalogue: shows an illustration of each of the components of the machine links each illustration with a part number.

Introduction

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

This page intentionally left blank

VI

Introduction

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

Foreword
How To Use This Manual
Purpose of the Manual This manual provides procedures for the servicing and maintenance of Aristocrats Jubilee Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine. It covers areas of machine operation that must be carried out by licensed technicians. User of the Manual The manual is aimed at technicians who need to understand detailed and technically complex aspects of the machine to service and maintain it. Warnings, Cautions and Notes WARNING
A warning immediately precedes an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not correctly followed, could result in personal injury or loss of life.

CAUTION
A caution immediately precedes an operating procedure or maintenance practice which, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to or destruction of the equipment, or corruption of the data.

Note
A note immediately precedes or follows an operating procedure, maintenance practice or condition which requires highlighting.

Units of Measure The manual uses the international system of units. The following conversion is provided for the convenience of readers. 1 W = 3.41241 Btu/hour 1 Btu/hour = 0.2930711 W 1 kJ = 0.948 Btu 1 Btu = 1.06 kJ.

Introduction

VII

Table of Contents Brief History of Aristocrat Leisure Industries

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Aristocrat Leisure Industries (ALI), established in 1953, is one of the oldest and most successful gaming machine manufacturers. ALI has supplied machines to every country and region in the world where gaming machines are legal, including Austria, France, Germany, Holland, Malaysia, New Zealand, the Philippines, Africa, Singapore, Russia, South America, and the USA. Aristocrat Leisure Industries employs over 1,400 people and has the largest gaming research and development facility in the Southern Hemisphere.

Offices

Spare Parts Department


PO Box 155, Rosebery, NSW 1445, Australia Outside Australia Tel: 612 9697 4146 Fax: 612 9697 4199 Within Australia Tel: 02 9697 4146 Fax: 02 9697 4199

Head Office
New South Wales Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd (ACN 001 660 715), 71 Longueville Road, Lane Cove NSW 2066, Australia. PO Box 808, Lane Cove NSW 1595, Australia. Outside Australia Tel: 612 9413 6300 Fax 612 9420-1326 Within Australia Tel: 02 9413 6300 Fax 02 9420-1326

International Offices
New Zealand
Auckland Office Aristocrat Leisure Industries (NZ) Ltd, 22 Vestey Drive, Mt. Wellington, Auckland, New Zealand. Tel: 0011 64 9 270 1600 Fax: 0015 64 9 270 1601 Christchurch Office Unit D 5 Tenahaun Place, Sockburn, Christchurch, New Zealand. Tel: 0011 64 3 338 7430 Fax: 0015 64 3 338 6492

Manufacturing / Operations
New South Wales Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd (ACN 001 660 715), 85-113 Dunning Avenue, Rosebery NSW 2018, Australia. Outside Australia Tel: 612 9697 4000 Fax: 612 9693 1340 Within Australia Tel: 02 9697 4000 Fax: 02 9693 1340

Russia
Aristocrat (Russia), GPO Box 134, 122108 Moscow, Russia. Tel / Fax: 0011 7 095 146 1326

National Offices
South Australia Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd. 75 Henley Beach Road, Mile End, South Australia 5031. Outside Australia Tel: 6108 8443 3664 Fax: 618 8443 3606 Within Australia Tel: 08 8443 3664 Fax 08 8443 3606 Victoria Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty Ltd. 672 Lorimer Street, Port Melbourne, Victoria. 3207 Outside Australia Tel: 613 9644 1000 Fax: 613 9644 1032 Within Australia Tel: 03 9644 1000 Fax: 03 9644 1032 Queensland Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty. Ltd. 60-62 Commercial Drive, Shailer Park, Qld. 4128, Australia Outside Australia Tel: 617 3801 4444 Fax 617 3801 4403 Within Australia Tel: 07 3801 4444 Fax 07 3801 4403 Western Australia Aristocrat Leisure Industries Pty. Ltd. PO Box 8206, Perth Business Centre, Perth WA 6846 Outside Australia Tel: 618 9355 1212 Fax: 618 9355 1213 Within Australia Tel: (08) 9355 1212 Fax: (08) 9355 1213

UK
Aristocrat Europe Falcon Unit 1, Stonefield Way, South Ruislip, Middlesex HA4 OJS, England. Tel: 0011 44 181 426 5822 Fax: 0015 44 181 426 5762

USA
Nevada Aristocrat Incorporated, 9895 Double R. Boulevard, Suite 200, Reno, Nevada 89511, USA. Tel: 0011 1 702 850 7767 Fax: 0011 1 702 860 5646 California Aristocrat Incorporated, 10960 W.River Street. #101E Truckee, CA 96161, USA. Tel: 0011 1 916 582 9570 Fax: 0015 1 916 582 1305

Latin America
1500 N.W. 79 Avenue, Miami, Florida, 33126 USA Tel: 0011 1 305 594 2881 Fax: 0015 1 305 594 9022

South Africa
ALI Gaming Solutions (Pty.) Ltd., PO Box 2570, Bramley 2018, South Africa. Tel: 0011 27 11 448 2320/1 Fax: 0015 27 11 448 2322

Japan
Tel: 0011 813 576 00071 Fax: 0015 813 576 00072

VIII

Introduction

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents
General Description
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2

1-1

Physical Description....................................................................... 1-3 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 1-8 Play Mode......................................................................................... 1-8 Operator Mode................................................................................ 1-10

Installation
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3

2-1

Pre-Installation Requirements ....................................................... 2-3 Inspection on Delivery.................................................................... 2-5 Installation Procedure .................................................................... 2-5 Mounting ........................................................................................... 2-5 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up ................................. 2-7 Commissioning the Machine............................................................. 2-8

Machine Modes
3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.7 3.2.9 3.3 3.3.1

3-1

Modes of Operation ........................................................................ 3-3 Play Mode ........................................................................................ 3-4 Player Operation............................................................................... 3-5 Video Display.................................................................................... 3-7 Sounds and Tunes............................................................................ 3-8 Pushbuttons...................................................................................... 3-8 Machine Self-Monitoring ................................................................... 3-8 Electromechanical Meters .............................................................. 3-11 Audit Meters (Soft Meters).............................................................. 3-13 Operator Mode .............................................................................. 3-14 Machine Identification ..................................................................... 3-16

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7

Accounting Information................................................................... 3-16 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................... 3-21 Self Test Mode ............................................................................... 3-24 Operator Setup / Selections Mode ................................................. 3-30 Power Save Mode .......................................................................... 3-33 Current Lockup Menu Fault Mode ............................................... 3-33

Cabinet, Door and Top Box


4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9

4-1

General Description ....................................................................... 4-3 Technical Description .................................................................... 4-5 Cabinet Door .................................................................................... 4-5 Latch Bar .......................................................................................... 4-5 Keyed Lock....................................................................................... 4-7 Cabinet Security ............................................................................... 4-7 Key Switches .................................................................................... 4-9 Bilock Locks.................................................................................... 4-10 Cash Box and Chute ...................................................................... 4-11 Logic Cage ..................................................................................... 4-11 Game Display Shelf........................................................................ 4-12

4.2.10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting ................................................. 4-12 4.2.11 Cabinet Door Artwork ..................................................................... 4-13 4.2.12 Mid Trim Panel ............................................................................... 4-14 4.2.13 Playbuttons..................................................................................... 4-14 4.2.14 Top Trim Panel ............................................................................... 4-17 4.2.15 Monitor Mask .................................................................................. 4-18 4.2.16 Coin Tray ........................................................................................ 4-19 4.2.17 Belly Panel Door............................................................................. 4-19 4.2.18 Belly Panel Security........................................................................ 4-20 4.2.19 Top Box .......................................................................................... 4-20 4.2.20 Top Box Artwork ............................................................................. 4-20 4.2.21 Top Box Fluorescent Lighting ......................................................... 4-20 4.3 General Maintenance ................................................................... 4-23

Revision 01

xi

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly


5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 5.3.3 5.3.4 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.5

5-1

Physical Description....................................................................... 5-3 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 5-5 Functional Specification ................................................................ 5-7 Input Requirements .......................................................................... 5-7 Output Requirements........................................................................ 5-7 Control Signals ................................................................................. 5-9 Physical Connections ....................................................................... 5-9 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 5-11 Fuses .............................................................................................. 5-11 Power Supply Assembly ................................................................. 5-11 General Maintenance.................................................................... 5-12

Coin Handling Assembly


6.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.3 6.4 6.5

6-1

Overview .......................................................................................... 6-3 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 6-4 Validation .......................................................................................... 6-4 Rejected Coins ................................................................................. 6-5 Accepted Coins................................................................................. 6-5 Alarm ................................................................................................ 6-6 Inhibit All ........................................................................................... 6-6 Self Calibration ................................................................................. 6-6 Diagnostics ....................................................................................... 6-6 Debris Flap ....................................................................................... 6-6 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 6-7 Clearing Coin Jams ........................................................................ 6-7 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts .................................. 6-8

xii

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.7 6.8

Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................. 6-9 Physical Description ......................................................................... 6-9 Basic Operation ................................................................................ 6-9 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 6-10 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 6-11 General Maintenance ................................................................... 6-11

Bank Note Acceptor


7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3

7-1

Technical Description .................................................................... 7-3 Overview........................................................................................... 7-3 Physical Description ......................................................................... 7-3 VFM4 Non-isolated Serial Interface................................................ 7-10 Installation and Machine Conditions .......................................... 7-13 Configuration Setup........................................................................ 7-13 Machine Condition Indicators ......................................................... 7-13 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 7-15 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker ..................................................... 7-15 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly ....................................................... 7-16 Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams................................................ 7-16 Care and Maintenance ................................................................. 7-18 Troubleshooting.............................................................................. 7-18 Periodic Maintenance ..................................................................... 7-20 Video Level Calibration................................................................... 7-20

Hopper
8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4

8-1
Technical Description .................................................................... 8-3 Physical Description ......................................................................... 8-3 Basic Operation ................................................................................ 8-6 Functional Description ...................................................................... 8-7 Hopper Interface Signals .................................................................. 8-7

Revision 01

xiii

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.5 8.6

Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 8-8 Removal............................................................................................ 8-8 Replacement..................................................................................... 8-8 Clearing Coin Jams ........................................................................ 8-9 Disassembly and Assembly......................................................... 8-10 Disassembly ................................................................................... 8-10 Assembly ........................................................................................ 8-11 Fault Finding ................................................................................. 8-12 General Maintenance.................................................................... 8-13

Video Monitor
9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3 9.4 9.5

9-1

Ceronix Monitor - General Description ......................................... 9-3 Technical Description .................................................................... 9-4 Power Supply.................................................................................... 9-4 Adjustment Procedures .................................................................... 9-4 Removal and Replacement ............................................................ 9-6 General Maintenance...................................................................... 9-6 Degaussing ..................................................................................... 9-7

Electromechanical Meters
10.1 10.2

10-1

General Description...................................................................... 10-3 Functional Description ................................................................. 10-4

10.2.1 Serial Interface................................................................................ 10-4 10.2.2 Overcurrent Protection.................................................................... 10-5 10.2.3 Meter Drive Outputs........................................................................ 10-5 10.2.4 PCB Expansion............................................................................... 10-5 10.2.5 Light Tower Interface ...................................................................... 10-5 10.2.6 Security Interface............................................................................ 10-5

xiv

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

10.2.7 Meter Detection .............................................................................. 10-5 10.3 10.4 10.5 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 10-7 Connector Pin Assignment.......................................................... 10-8 General Maintenance ................................................................. 10-10

Main Board
11.1 11.2

11-1

Introduction................................................................................... 11-4 Physical Description .................................................................... 11-5

11.2.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ............................................. 11-5 11.3 Functional Description................................................................ 11-6

11.3.1 Main Board Functions..................................................................... 11-7 11.4 Technical Description ................................................................. 11-8

11.4.1 ARM250 Microprocessor .............................................................. 11-10 11.4.2 Sound ........................................................................................... 11-11 11.4.3 Video ............................................................................................ 11-12 11.4.4 Reset ............................................................................................ 11-12 11.4.5 Debug (Keyboard) Port................................................................. 11-13 11.4.6 Debugging .................................................................................... 11-13 11.4.7 External I/O Expansion ................................................................. 11-14 11.4.8 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface (where fitted).......................... 11-14 11.4.9 Memory......................................................................................... 11-15 11.4.10 Real Time Clock .......................................................................... 11-16 11.4.11 Battery Backup Circuit................................................................. 11-16 11.4.12 Power Control Interface............................................................... 11-17 11.4.13 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry...................................... 11-18 11.4.14 Printer and Mechanical Meters.................................................... 11-19 11.4.15 Mechanical Switches................................................................... 11-19 11.4.16 Security ....................................................................................... 11-19 11.4.17 Coin Handling System................................................................. 11-20 11.4.18 Hopper Interface ......................................................................... 11-21

Revision 01

xv

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.4.19 Serial Channels ........................................................................... 11-21 11.4.20 Bank Note Acceptor..................................................................... 11-22 11.4.21 Interface Board ............................................................................ 11-22 11.5 11.6 Removal and Replacement Procedures .................................. 11-23 Description of Connectors......................................................... 11-24

11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board .......................................... 11-24 11.6.2 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ............................................... 11-26 11.6.3 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 .................................................... 11-28 11.6.4 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ............................... 11-30

Interface Board Part No. 410315 Issue B


12.1

12-1

Physical Description..................................................................... 12-3

12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations ............................................. 12-3 12.2 12.3 Technical Description .................................................................. 12-5 Description of Connectors........................................................... 12-7

12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3....................................... 12-7 12.3.2 Driver Board, P4 ............................................................................. 12-7 12.3.3 LAB Comms, P5 ............................................................................. 12-7 12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6 ................................................................... 12-7 12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24 ........................................................... 12-7 12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11 ............................................ 12-9 12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12....................................................................... 12-10 12.3.8 Bill Acceptor, Backlight and Security, P13 .................................... 12-11 12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18................................... 12-11 12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21...................................................................... 12-13 12.3.11 Mikohn, P16................................................................................. 12-13 12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19 ..................................................................... 12-14 12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20...................................................................... 12-14 12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23....................................................... 12-15 12.3.15 Hopper, P25 ................................................................................ 12-15 12.3.16 Video, P26 ................................................................................... 12-15

xvi

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27 ......................................................... 12-16 12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28 ............................. 12-16 12.3.19 Power Supply, P29...................................................................... 12-17 12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30......................................................... 12-17 12.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................... 12-18

I/O Driver Board - 410415


13.1

13-1

Physical Description .................................................................... 13-3

13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations .................................. 13-3 13.2 Functional Description................................................................. 13-3

13.2.1 Power Supply ................................................................................. 13-6 13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps................................................................. 13-6 13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface .................................................................. 13-7 13.3 13.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ................................... 13-10 Connector Pin Assignment........................................................ 13-11

Communications Configuration Board - 410217


14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5

14-1

Physical Description .................................................................... 14-3 Functional Description................................................................. 14-4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ..................................... 14-6 Connector Pin Assignments........................................................ 14-7 General Maintenance ................................................................... 14-7

LAB Communications Board - 410174


15.1

15-1

Technical Description .................................................................. 15-3

15.1.1 Physical Description ....................................................................... 15-3 15.1.2 Basic Operation .............................................................................. 15-6 15.1.3 LAB PSU Chassis Description........................................................ 15-7

Revision 01

xvii

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

15.2

Removal and Replacement ........................................................ 15-10

15.2.1 Removal........................................................................................ 15-10 15.2.2 Replacement................................................................................. 15-10 15.3 Connector Pin Assignments ...................................................... 15-11

15.3.1 Interface Board Slot P6................................................................. 15-11 15.4 General Maintenance.................................................................. 15-13

Progressive Jackpot System


16.1 16.2.

16-1

Overview ........................................................................................ 16-3 Progressive SEI Board (410227).................................................. 16-3

Machine Fault Finding


17.1

17-1

Fault Finding ................................................................................. 17-3

Games

A-1

Spinning Reel Games ................................................................................... A-3

Glossary Index

xviii

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine - External View ............................. 1-5 Figure 1-2 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features...................... 1-7 Figure 1-3 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode ............................................................. 1-9 Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions...................................................................................... 2-4 Figure 2-2 Machine Footprint and Clearances ................................................................ 2-6 Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display ................................................................................ 3-4 Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations ...................................................... 3-7 Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout ............................................................................. 3-8 Figure 3-4 Electromechanical Meters............................................................................ 3-12 Figure 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure................................................... 3-15 Figure 4-1 Cabinet and Cabinet Door - General Description .......................................... 4-4 Figure 4-2 Latch Bar........................................................................................................ 4-6 Figure 4-3 Keyed Lock Assembly.................................................................................... 4-7 Figure 4-4 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment ...................................................................... 4-8 Figure 4-5 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement .................................................. 4-10 Figure 4-6 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features.................... 4-10 Figure 4-7 Play Button Lamps ....................................................................................... 4-15 Figure 4-8 Playbutton - Exploded View ......................................................................... 4-17 Figure 4-9 Top Trim Panel and Monitor Mask.............................................................. 4-18 Figure 4-10 Top Box...................................................................................................... 4-21 Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location .................................................................. 5-3 Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly................................................................................. 5-4 Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram ...................................................... 5-5 Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution ..................................................................... 5-6 Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Handling Assembly ................................................................... 6-3 Figure 6-2 Condor Coin Validator.................................................................................... 6-5 Figure 6-3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................................... 6-9 Figure 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly ...................................................................... 7-4 Figure 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly .................................................... 7-5 Figure 7-3 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide ................................................. 7-6 Figure 7-4 Stacker ............................................................................................................ 7-7 Figure 7-5 Typical Mid Trim Layout ................................................................................. 7-8 Figure 7-6 Input/Output Connector.................................................................................. 7-9 Figure 7-7 Interconnection Diagram ................................................................................ 7-9 Figure 7-8 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays .................................................. 7-10 Figure 7-9 VFM4 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages........................................... 7-11 Figure 7-10 VFM4 Protocol - Hex Code Messages....................................................... 7-12 Figure 7-11 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options .................................................. 7-13 Figure 7-12 Bank Note Acceptor - DIP Switch Location................................................ 7-19 Figure 8-1 Hopper Location (Standard Disc Hopper shown) .......................................... 8-3 Figure 8-2 Hopper- rear view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)....................................... 8-4 Figure 8-3 Hopper - exploded view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown).............................. 8-5 Figure 8-4 Hopper Photo-optic Detector ....................................................................... 8-13 Figure 9-1 Ceronix Video Monitor and Control Panel...................................................... 9-5 Figure 10-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location ................................................ 10-3 Figure 10-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram ......................... 10-4 Figure 10-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder Sides ............................................................................................................... 10-6 Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board .............................................................................. 11-5 Figure 11-2 System Architecture ................................................................................... 11-6 Figure 11-3 Main Board block diagram ......................................................................... 11-8 Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board layout (not detailed) .................................................... 11-9 Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location ........................................................ 12-4 Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location ........................................................................ 13-3 Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram .............................................................. 13-4 Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout........................................... 13-5 Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals................................................................. 13-7 Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals .................................................... 13-8

Revision 01

xix

Table of Contents

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location ......................................14-3 Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram ............................14-4 Figure 15-1 LAB Communications Board - position in logic cage .................................15-3 Figure 15-2 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout ....................................15-5 Figure 15-3 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram ...........................................15-6 Figure 15-4 LAB PSU Chassis ......................................................................................15-8 Figure 15-5 PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring ......................................15-8 Figure 15-6 LAB Communications Board and PSU Kit .................................................15-9 Figure 16-1 SEI Board - data flows ...............................................................................16-4 Figure 16-2 Cashcade - data flows................................................................................16-6 Figure A-1 MK V Video Game Screen Example...............................................................0-4 Figure A-2 MK V Pay Table Example ..............................................................................0-5

List of Tables
Table 1-1 Machine Modules ............................................................................................1-3 Table 1-2 Machine Key Types .........................................................................................1-6 Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu ....................................................................................3-14 Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display.......................................................................3-16 Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu........................................................................3-17 Table 3-4 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1............................3-17 Table 3-5 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2............................3-18 Table 3-6 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 1....................................3-18 Table 3-7 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 2....................................3-19 Table 3-8 Accounting Information - Reset Periodic Meters...........................................3-19 Table 3-9 Accounting Information - Game Replay ........................................................3-19 Table 3-10 Accounting Information Meters of Last Game..........................................3-20 Table 3-11 Accounting Information - Game Statistics ...................................................3-20 Table 3-12 Accounting Information - Gamble Statistics ................................................3-21 Table 3-13 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................................3-21 Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 1...............................3-22 Table 3-15 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 2...............................3-22 Table 3-16 Diagnostic Information - Error Log ..............................................................3-23 Table 3-17 Diagnostic Information - Panic Log .............................................................3-23 Table 3-18 Diagnostic Information - Bill Acceptor Information ......................................3-24 Table 3-19 Self Test Mode Menu ..................................................................................3-24 Table 3-20 Self Test Mode Requirements.....................................................................3-25 Table 3-21 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test........................................................................3-25 Table 3-22 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test ................................................................3-26 Table 3-23 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test .....................................................................3-26 Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu.................................................3-27 Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions......................................3-27 Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Sound Effects Test ..........................................................3-28 Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Factory Test .....................................................................3-28 Table 3-28 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test.............................................................3-29 Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result .................................................3-29 Table 3-30 Operator Setup / Selections Menu ..............................................................3-30 Table 3-31 Operator Setup/Selections - Machine Options Display ...............................3-31 Table 3-32 Operator Setup/Selections - Real Time Clock Setup ..................................3-32 Table 3-33 Operator Setup/Selections - Sound System Setup .....................................3-32 Table 3-34 Operator Setup/Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup...................................3-32 Table 3-35 Operator Setup/Selections - Layout Setup ..................................................3-33 Table 3-36 Power Save Mode .......................................................................................3-33 Table 3-37 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu..................................................3-34 Table 3-38 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Screens .....................................3-35 Table 6-1 Condor Validator Interface Signals..................................................................6-8 Table 6-2 Fault Finding..................................................................................................6-11 Table 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding.................................................................7-18 Table 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor DIP Switch Functions ...................................................7-19

xx

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table of Contents

Table 8-1 Fault Finding.................................................................................................. 8-12 Table 10-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board ...................................................... 10-8 Table 10-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface................................................................ 10-8 Table 10-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface .................................................................. 10-9 Table 10-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface ........................................................................... 10-9 Table 10-5 S1 - Security Interface................................................................................. 10-9 Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics.............................................................. 11-16 Table 11-2 Power Control System Signal Lines .......................................................... 11-17 Table 11-3 SPI Channel Signals ................................................................................. 11-18 Table 11-4 Optical Security Sensor Assignment......................................................... 11-19 Table 11-5 Mechanical Security Switch Assignment................................................... 11-20 Table 11-6 Coin Handling Signals ............................................................................... 11-20 Table 11-7 Hopper Control Signals ............................................................................. 11-21 Table 11-8 Communications Configuration Board connector - P23............................ 11-24 Table 11-9 Optically Isolated Connector - P20............................................................ 11-26 Table 11-10 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 .............................................................. 11-28 Table 11-11 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21.......................................... 11-30 Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections....................................................................... 12-6 Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation ........................................................... 13-8 Table 13-2 LED Functions............................................................................................. 13-9 Table 15-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout........................................................................................ 15-4 Table 15-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout................................................................................... 15-4 Table 15-3 Interface Board Bus Connector for LAB Communications Board ............. 15-11 Table 16-1 SEI Board Configurations............................................................................ 16-3 Table 16-2 DIP Switch Settings..................................................................................... 16-5 Table 16-3 Mikohn Interface.......................................................................................... 16-7 Table 16-4 Machine Interface........................................................................................ 16-7 Table 16-5 CDS Display Interface ................................................................................. 16-8 Table 16-6 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface ........................................................... 16-8 Table 17-1 Fault Finding................................................................................................ 17-3

Revision 01

xxi

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

General Description

_____Chapter 1_____
General Description
1.1 1.2 1.2.1 1.2.2 Physical Description .............................................................. 1-3 Basic Operation...................................................................... 1-8 Play Mode ................................................................................ 1-8 Operator Mode ....................................................................... 1-10

Revision 01

1-1

General Description

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 1-1 Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine - External View..............................1-5 Figure 1-2 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features......................1-7 Figure 1-3 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode .............................................................1-9

List of Tables
Table 1-1 Machine Modules ............................................................................................1-3 Table 1-2 Machine Key Types .........................................................................................1-6

1-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

General Description

1.1 Physical Description


Aristocrats Jubilee Mk4/5XR series of gaming machines have been developed to comply with existing and future regulations and to the same technoligcal standard as the Aristocrat MVP machine. The machine consists of existing 540 Mk4 cabinets that have been modified to accept the high standard of the MVP electronics currently being produced by Aristocrat. The Mk4/5XR Series gaming machines feature:

Advanced, high-performance electronics based on ARM RISC technology; A wide range of machine options, including note and coin denominations, communication links, and progressive systems; A comprehensive security system; Modular design and construction; Simplified operation and maintenance procedures; High resolution video displays, advanced animation and graphics, and improved sounds and tunes.

The following table briefly identifies the various modules of the gaming machine. Figure 1-1 shows the location of machine modules.
Table 1-1 Machine Modules

Machine Module
Cabinet, Door and Top Box. Video Monitor Main Board

Description
The physical outer enclosure which provides for the location and mounting of other modules. High resolution 640 x 400 pixels for improved-quality graphics. The monitor is the main medium for displaying game operation and status to the player. The Main printed circuit board (PCB) provides primary control of the MVP Video Gaming Machine. The Main Board is interfaced (via the Interface Board) to all the major components of the machine. The board receives signals from, and sends control signals to machine components. The Main Board houses the central processor and other logic components for game generation, video, security items, power control, memory storage, and communications. The interface board houses an array of connectors which are used to electrically connect (via direct mechanical coupling or through looms and ribbon cables) the various electrical components of the machine to the Main Board. The I/O Driver Board drives the lamps, receives inputs from the pushbuttons, interfaces with the coin handling system, and provides a battery-backed circuit for security monitoring (if required). The Communication Configuration Board (CCB) 'piggy-backs' to the Main Board. The board is used to set up the communications channels of the Main Board (up to three) for the bank note acceptor and printer.

Interface Board (may also be called the Backplane). I/O Driver Board

Communication Configuration Board

Revision 01

1-3

General Description

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

Mechanical Meter Board

Logic Cage

Power Supply Assembly

Hopper

Coin Handling System

Bank Note Acceptor

The LAB communications board mounts directly to the interface board. The board provides up to six extra ports for communications to various subsidiary equipment as required by the New South Wales Liquor Administration Board. The LAB PSU Chassis that provides power connections to the six interfaces is located behind the video monitor. The mechanical meter board controls the functions of the electromechanical meters that are used to record accounting data in a physical format. The signals for the meters are received from the Main Board via the Interface Board. The logic cage consists of a secure, steel cabinet that houses the Main, Communications Configuration, I/O Driver and LAB PCBAs. The section of the Interface Board that interfaces with the Main Board and the I/O Driver Board is also located within the logic cage. The power supply assembly converts the AC mains input voltage into low voltage DC power for the various machine modules and circuits. Power is directed via the Interface Board to the machine components. The video monitor and the fluorescent lighting system receive AC power directly from the power supply assembly. The hopper acts as a holding unit for coins. When instructed by the main board, the hopper returns coins to the player. For each coin ejected, the hopper sends a signal to the Main Board. When the required number of coins have been dispensed, the Main Board signals the hopper motor to stop. The function of the coin handling system is to check the validity of coins inserted, establish a count and pass signals for processing. The coin handling system directs coins to the hopper, cash box, or coin tray. The function of the bank note acceptor is to accept valid note currency and register the appropriate number of credits for game play. A note stacker is used to store the notes and to record monetary and statistical information.

1-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

General Description

DOORS, FRONT PANELS & DENOMINATION PATCHES

Top Box

Top Trim

Top Box Lock Top Box Latch

Monitor Electromechanical Meters

Mid Trim

Jackpot Key Switch Audit Key Switch

Belly Panel

Belly Panel Lock Main Door Lock Main Door Latch

Coin Tray
I0126

Figure 1-1 Mk4/5XR Series Video Gaming Machine - External View

Revision 01

1-5

General Description

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Machine Keys The gaming machine requires keys for the following locks and switches to establish effective security and correct operation. Refer to Figure 1-1 for lock and keyswitch positions. Note
A key may only be removed from its lock or key switch after it has been returned to the locked position.

Table 1-2 Machine Key Types

Name
Audit Key Switch

Function
Enables entry to the Operator Mode Menu (see Machine Modes). Insert the Audit Key and turn it 90 clockwise.
I0004

Type

Cabinet Door Lock

Allows the operator to open the cabinet door. Insert the cabinet door key and turn it 180 clockwise, then lift the latch to release the door.
I0005

Jackpot Reset Key Switch also called the Cancel Credit Key Switch Logic Cage Lock (if fitted)

Allows the operator to reset the machine after a machine fault has been corrected (see Machine Modes). Insert the Cancel Credit key, turn it 90 clockwise then back again. Allows the operator access to the PCB logic cage. Insert the logic cage key and turn it 180 clockwise.

I0006

I0005

Bank Note Acceptor Cage Door Lock(s) (optional) Bank Note Stacker Door Lock Top Box Door Lock

Allows operator access to the bank note stacker. Turn key 180 clockwise to open.
I0005

Allows the operator to remove the notes from the stacker. Insert the key and turn it 90 clockwise, open the stacker door and remove the notes. Allows the operator to open the top box. Insert the top box key and turn it 180 clockwise, then press in the top box latch pin release the door.

I0007

I0005

1-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

General Description

Belly Panel Door Lock

Allows the operator to open the belly panel door to gain access to the bank note stacker. Insert the key and turn it 180 clockwise.
I0005

Bilock Locks The gaming machines may be fitted with high-security Bilock camlocks and switchlocks with a unique "U" shaped keyway (see Figure 1-2). The locks feature the Quick Change Core facility whereby the keyed core of the lock is fitted separate to the lock barrel. Locks may be rekeyed in a matter of seconds without having to dismantle the lock assembly. To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and pull out the lock assembly.

Bilock Key

Quick Change Core

Figure 1-2 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features

Revision 01

1-7

General Description

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

1.2 Basic Operation


The functions of the gaming machine are controlled by an advanced software and hardware platform that provides operators with greater control over machine functions and simplifies maintenance and machine setup. New games developed with the software provide higher quality graphics, new sounds and a wider variety of features. All processing is carried out on the Main Board. The Main Board contains the central processor and the game EPROMs which hold the software required for game generation and video graphics. All data and control signals to and from the Main Board are distributed by the Interface Board. The Interface Board also distributes regulated low voltage power from the power control system. The machine has two major modes of operation: Play mode and Operator mode. The machine is in Play Mode when the cabinet door is closed and locked, the Audit key switch is in the OFF position and there are no fault or lock-up conditions. The machine is in Operator Mode when the Audit key switch is in the ON position. Operator Mode provides for a range of operational procedures, data displays, and specific machine functions. Normal gameplay is disabled during Operator Mode.

1.2.1 Play Mode


When in Play Mode, the machine:

permits gameplay, operates security and audit features, runs self-checking and testing continuously, monitors and records gameplay activities continuously, displays comments and guidance for players, operators and technicians.

Basic machine operation in Play Mode is shown in Figure 1-3. Depending on the machine configuration, credits may be registered by inserting coins, bank notes or tokens. The machine has security features for screening the currency tendered to ensure that only valid currency is accepted. If the currency is accepted by the machine, the playbuttons on the mid trim become active and flash. The player may then insert more currency, play a game by pressing one of the flashing playbuttons, or have the machine return the current credit total by pressing the COLLECT pushbutton. The player determines how many credits to wager by pressing one of the BET playbuttons, and the BET meter on the display screen shows the credits wagered.

1-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

General Description

Central Processor

PLAYER INSERTS CREDITS

Coin/Token Invalid Currency Returned To Player

Bank Note

AUDIT DATA

CONTROL INFORMATION

REJECT Machine Registers Credits ACCEPT

AUDIT DATA

Communications Interface

Machine Checks Currency Validity

ADD WIN Player Presses Selected Pushbutton

Win Credits To Be Added

AUDIT DATA

COLLECT PLAY WIN NO WIN Remaining Credit NO Credits are Paid to Player YES

Machine Displays Game Outcome

I0011

Figure 1-3 Basic Game Operation in Play Mode

Revision 01

1-9

General Description

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Once the player starts a game by pressing one of the active playbuttons, the machine runs the game sequence and displays the outcome on the screen. If the result is a winning combination, the player may gamble the win (if the gamble feature is available); otherwise, the machine increments the credits won. If the result is not a winning combination, the player may continue gameplay provided there are credits remaining. The machine is equipped with electronic audit (soft) meters which continuously monitor and record credit movement and game activity. Electromechanical meters are also fitted. The electronic audit meters are accessed through the Operator Mode. The information in these meters is used for audit calculations and security purposes. If the machine encounters an abnormal condition, it alerts the operator by automatically entering Machine Lockup. In lockup, gameplay is disabled to prevent any further player interaction and guidance information is displayed in the game message area. The lockup condition can be identified by examining the Current Lockup screen which is accessed from the Operator Mode Menu. Each lockup condition has an associated help screen that provides information on how to fix the problem and remove the lockup.

1.2.2 Operator Mode


Within Operator Mode (Audit Key ON), the following options are available:

machine identification accounting information diagnostic information self test mode operator setup/selections power save modetion mode current lockup information.

In Operator Mode, the electronic audit meters and the electromechanical meters do not function. Menu selections may be used to review the machine details, select new configurations, and carry out machine tests. Refer to the chapter Machine Modes for detailed information.

1-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Installation

________Chapter 2________
Installation
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.3.1 2.3.2 2.3.3 Pre-Installation Requirements ..................................................... 2-3 Inspection on Delivery .................................................................. 2-5 Installation Procedure................................................................... 2-5 Mounting ......................................................................................... 2-5 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up ................................ 2-7 Commissioning the Machine ........................................................... 2-8

Revision 01

2-1

Installation

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions......................................................................................2-4 Figure 2-2 Machine Footprint and Clearances ................................................................2-6

2-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Installation

2.1 Pre-Installation Requirements


The following items are required to install a machine: verification of jurisdictional approval. a floor plan (only required for new installations). a suitable base on which to mount the machine. adequate clearance between the sides of adjacent machines to allow the doors to be opened (a clearance of 180 mm is recommended). access to mains power outlets and connection cables of peripheral devices. machine keys (if locks are fitted).

See Figure 2-1 for machine dimensions.

WARNING
The gaming machine is a heavy item. To avoid personal injury, follow the national standard and code of practice for manual handling.

WARNING
This is a Class A product. In a domestic environment, this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may e required to take adequate action.

CAUTION
The gaming machine must be transported and handled with care. Ensure the machine is not dropped or severely bumped.

Important Note
All mains power wiring must be installed by a qualified electrician and comply with Australian standard AS/NZS 3000-2000, or equivalent national/jurisdictional standards for mains wiring.

Revision 01

2-3

Installation

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

High Boy 1460 mm

Top Box Note 2. Casino 1180 mm

Monitor

Note 1. Low Boy 860 mm

Mid Trim

Belly Panel

Coin Tray

I0186

Depth 630 mm
Note 1: Accomodates monitor picture tube. Note 2: Box fitted to cover mechanical meters where no top box is fitted (approx. height 50 mm).

Width 500 mm

Figure 2-1 Machine Dimensions

2-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Installation

2.2 Inspection on Delivery


Inspect all exterior panels of the cabinet for damage that may have occurred during transportation. Report any damage to your supervisor.

2.3 Installation Procedure


Note
Installation and commissioning of machines must be carried out by an appropriately licensed technician and must comply with the regulations of the jurisdictional authority.

The following procedures are for mounting, connecting, and commissioning the gaming machine into service.

2.3.1 Mounting
WARNING
The gaming machine is a heavy item. To prevent personal injury, follow the national standard and code of practice for manual handling.

Mount the machine to the cabinet base as follows: 1. Position the machine on the cabinet base, aligning it with the cash box and cable holes (see Figure 2-2). Drill holes in the cabinet base to match four rectangular mounting holes. The machine must be fixed in four positions, two at the front and two at the back, to meet stability requirements. Secure the machine to the base using either bolts and nuts or the specialpurpose fasteners provided.

2.

Revision 01

2-5

Installation

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

115.5 103 157 74

96

44

118 192

261
3 APERTURES 52 SQUARE

MOUNTING BOLT HOLES 8.7 FOR 5/16 BSW COACH BOLT

157

157 158

268.2

268.2

FRONT FOOTPRINT

180

180

149 540

CLEARANCES
I0181

Note: all dimensions in milimetres

Figure 2-2 Machine Footprint and Clearances

2-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Installation

2.3.2 Pre-start Connections, Checks and Power Up


Perform the following machine connections and checks: 1. Check that the Mechanical Meter Board is firmly seated in the top box or the low boy meter cover and that the following printed circuit board assemblies (PCBAs) are firmly seated in the logic cage: Main Board I/O Driver Board LAB Board Communications Configuration Board Interface Board Note
For accessing PCBAs, refer to the relevant chapter in the Service Manual.

2.

The machine power supply and monitor isolation transformer are set at the factory for a mains input voltage of 240 V unless clearly labeled otherwise. Should there be a need to change the mains input voltage setting: WARNING
Make sure the machine is disconnected from mains power before adjusting voltage settings.

CAUTION
Selecting the wrong power supply and/or monitor isolation transformer voltage will cause considerable damage to the power supply and/or monitor transformer.

a.

Set the voltage selector switch on the power supply for the correct mains input voltage. The switch is mounted on the metal housing of the power supply assembly, which is located at the back of the cabinet, in the bottom right-hand corner. Where a Ceronix monitor with a manually-switched isolation mains input transformer is used, set the mains input switch on the transformer to match the mains input voltage.

b.

3.

Make sure that the mains power switch is OFF. Connect the mains power cable to the machine. The power cable may enter the cabinet either via a hole in the base of the cabinet or via a hole in the rear wall of the cabinet. A hole is provided in the base of the cabinet, near the cable entrance, to allow a clamp to be fitted to the mains cable. The purpose of this clamp is to prevent the mains power cable from being accidentally disconnected. This clamp should be fitted if there is a reasonable risk that the mains power cable may be accidentally disconnected.

Revision 01

2-7

Installation

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

WARNING
Visually check that the insulation of the mains power cable is sound. Check that all machine earth wires (green/yellow stripe or braid) and screws that were moved during installation are correctly attached.

4.

Switch ON the machine and close the main door within 5 seconds (closing the main door within 5 seconds will ensure that the monitor automatically degausses correctly - refer step 5 below). The monitor and fluorescent lighting system will then be powered up. The machine will perform selftesting procedures for a few moments and any faults detected will be highlighted by a message on the video screen. To fix detected faults, refer to Fault Mode in the chapter Machine Modes. If the monitor exhibits colour aberrations, this may be the result of magnetic interference. Degaussing the monitor and cabinet, as described below, can remove the colour aberrations. a. Power down the machine and wait for a 30-minute period to elapse. This time delay enables the monitor circuit varistors to cool sufficiently and create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous content and that of the cabinet. Power up the machine and close the door within 5 seconds. Automatic degaussing will now occur. Should colour aberrations persist, use a degaussing wand to degauss the monitor and cabinet. Follow the standard field procedures for degaussing-wand usage.

5.

b. c.

2.3.3 Commissioning the Machine


Carry out the following procedures to commission the machine: 1. Check that the machine program type and variation match the customer order. Use the Operator Mode menu and the options described in the chapter Machine Modes. Fill the hopper as described below: Important Note
The procedure for filling the hopper is dependent on house rules.

2.

a.

b. c.

Obtain the correct number of coins required to fill the hopper (the number is displayed in the Operator Mode Menu Operator Setup / Selections Machine Options display). Open the cabinet door (the machine will display a Main Door Open message). Place the coins into the hopper. Note that some jurisdictions may require that the hopper be weighed and its weight recorded.

2-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Installation

d. e. f.

g. 3.

Close and lock the cabinet door; the machine will remain in fault mode. Insert the Jackpot Reset (Cancel Credit) key, turn it clockwise and back again. This will clear the lockup Hopper Empty. In some markets, the hopper refill amount must be recorded in the machine memory. To do this, insert and turn the Audit Key to enter Operator Mode, select Hopper Refill and press the appropriate buttons to record the refill amount. Turn the Audit key back to return to Play Mode. Record the number of coins placed in the hopper in the refill register.

Where the Operator permits, monitor gameplay operations for any faults: a. Ensure the machine accepts bank notes by inserting a valid bank note (in good condition) and confirming that it is accepted and credited correctly. If the bank note is not accepted on the second attempt, repeat the test on another note. If the second bank note is also rejected, refer to the Fault Finding section in the Bank Note Acceptor chapter. Ensure the machine accepts coins by checking that coins are accepted, credited, and paid out correctly.

b.

Retrieve bank notes and coins inserted during testing. 4. Machines operating on a network system may now be connected and installed onto the network. For installation procedure refer to the manual for the particular communications network used. Request an Operator to record the values of the electromechanical meters and the soft audit meters (as required by the applicable jurisdictional authority). Log installation data as specified by the appropriate jurisdictional requirements.

5.

6.

The machine may now commence operation.

Revision 01

2-9

Installation

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

2-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

________Chapter 3________
Machine Modes
3.1 3.2 3.2.1 3.2.2 3.2.3 3.2.4 3.2.5 3.2.7 3.2.9 3.3 3.3.1 3.3.2 3.3.3 3.3.4 3.3.5 3.3.6 3.3.7 Modes of Operation ...................................................................... 3-3 Play Mode ...................................................................................... 3-4 Player Operation............................................................................. 3-5 Video Display.................................................................................. 3-7 Sounds and Tunes ......................................................................... 3-8 Pushbuttons.................................................................................... 3-8 Machine Self-Monitoring................................................................. 3-8 Electromechanical Meters ............................................................ 3-11 Audit Meters (Soft Meters)............................................................ 3-13 Operator Mode ............................................................................ 3-14 Machine Identification................................................................... 3-16 Accounting Information................................................................. 3-16 Diagnostic Information Menu........................................................ 3-21 Self Test Mode ............................................................................. 3-24 Operator Setup / Selections Mode ............................................... 3-30 Power Save Mode ........................................................................ 3-33 Current Lockup Menu Fault Mode ............................................. 3-33

Revision 01

3-1

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures:
Figure 3-1 Figure 3-2 Figure 3-3 Figure 3-4 Figure 3-5 Format of Game Display ................................................................................3-4 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations ......................................................3-7 Typical Pushbutton Layout .............................................................................3-8 Electromechanical Meters............................................................................3-12 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure...................................................3-15

List of Tables:
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu ....................................................................................3-14 Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display.......................................................................3-16 Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu........................................................................3-17 Table 3-4 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1............................3-17 Table 3-5 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2............................3-18 Table 3-6 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 1....................................3-18 Table 3-7 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 2....................................3-19 Table 3-8 Accounting Information - Reset Periodic Meters...........................................3-19 Table 3-9 Accounting Information - Game Replay ........................................................3-19 Table 3-10 Accounting Information Meters of Last Game..........................................3-20 Table 3-11 Accounting Information - Game Statistics ...................................................3-20 Table 3-12 Accounting Information - Gamble Statistics ................................................3-21 Table 3-13 Diagnostic Information Menu.......................................................................3-21 Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 1...............................3-22 Table 3-15 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 2...............................3-22 Table 3-16 Diagnostic Information - Error Log ..............................................................3-23 Table 3-17 Diagnostic Information - Panic Log .............................................................3-23 Table 3-18 Diagnostic Information - Bill Acceptor Information ......................................3-24 Table 3-19 Self Test Mode Menu ..................................................................................3-24 Table 3-20 Self Test Mode Requirements.....................................................................3-25 Table 3-21 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test........................................................................3-25 Table 3-22 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test ................................................................3-26 Table 3-23 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test .....................................................................3-26 Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu.................................................3-27 Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions......................................3-27 Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Sound Effects Test ..........................................................3-28 Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Factory Test .....................................................................3-28 Table 3-28 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test.............................................................3-29 Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result .................................................3-29 Table 3-30 Operator Setup / Selections Menu ..............................................................3-30 Table 3-31 Operator Setup/Selections - Machine Options Display ...............................3-31 Table 3-32 Operator Setup/Selections - Real Time Clock Setup ..................................3-32 Table 3-33 Operator Setup/Selections - Sound System Setup .....................................3-32 Table 3-34 Operator Setup/Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup...................................3-32 Table 3-35 Operator Setup/Selections - Layout Setup ..................................................3-33 Table 3-36 Power Save Mode .......................................................................................3-33 Table 3-37 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu..................................................3-34 Table 3-38 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Screens .....................................3-35

3-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

3.1 Modes of Operation


Aristocrat designers have implemented software improvements in response to Mk V Series I recommendations from customers, players and service technicians. Improvements continue in development methods and in the range of features that improve earnings capacity. Special attention has been given to features that make the new MVP model more user friendly, more serviceable, and more reliable. In addition, new data items have been added to meet jurisdictional requirements, and a design priority maintains upward compatibility for Mk V Series I games. Improvements include:

Operator Menu displays are shown in distinctive colours. Four comment lines provide clearer guidance for players, operators and service personnel line allocation is Game Comment, Game Feature, Player Instruction, and Jurisdiction and Lockup Messages (see Figure 3-1). A single set of game sounds has been selected from Mk V Series I and earlier models. Improved statistics include a Game Specific Statistics display to enable more accurate game and player evaluations. A new Quick Combination Test shows symbol positions without having to play a game. An expanded Game Replay display shows a 10-game history, and each game has jurisdictional meter readings at game start, game end, and start-of-next game. Improved Panic Log displays include date/time stamping, source program error location, and user-friendly error description. Other improvements include a changed date/time format, enhanced Machine Identification lines, a Quick Button Test, and new Diagnostic Meters.

The Mk4/5XR Gaming Machine is operated in two main modes, Play Mode and Operator Mode. Play Mode permits gameplay while the machine is fully operational and the cabinet door is closed. Operator Mode allows the operator to configure the machine, view audit information, carry out machine tests, and reset machine faults. Turning the Operator Key ON switches the machine from Play Mode to Operator Mode.

Revision 01

3-3

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

3.2 Play Mode


The machine is in Play Mode when the cabinet door is closed and locked, and there are no active lockup conditions. In Play Mode the machine:

shows game displays in readiness for player operation, carries out gameplay, continuously monitors and records play activities, continuously runs the self-test processes, displays comments and guidance for players, operators, and technicians.

Lockup comments

Main Door Open

Win limit
I0187

Figure 3-1 Format of Game Display

Figure 3-1 shows the format of a game display. The symbols on the screen will vary depending on the particular game software being used. The CREDIT, BET, and WIN game meters show the number of credits applicable at the current stage of the game. Machine conditions, including security alerts, are also displayed in a message area. Messages displaying maximum win amounts may also appear on the screen. Lockup messages are listed in Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu. In Play Mode the machine operates with full security features. For example, the machine monitors operations and alerts operators should malfunction or tampering occur. Electronic meters and electromechanical meters (if fitted) record details of gameplay and machine operations in Play Mode.

3-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Options Besides being able to alter machine controls to suit house preferences, the Mk4/5XR machine provides menu controls for setting important game and player preferences, including: Game percentage, Base credit value (a game credit), machine token amount for coin entry, and acceptable bill ($ note) denominations, Links to house and stand-alone progressives in various levels, if fitted. Hopper coin-collect limit, Game gamble option, Volume settings for sounds and tunes.

Refer to Operator Setup/Selection Mode. Note


Jurisdictional requirements must be followed when configuring machines.

3.2.1 Player Operation


When the machine is switched on and the cabinet door is closed and locked, the fluorescent tubes light up and the machine automatically initiates a self-test. If no faults are detected, gameplay may begin. Spinning Reel Games When a player inserts a coin or note, the machine either accepts or rejects the currency. If the machine accepts the currency, it increments the CREDIT meter on the game video display by the number of credits. The mid trim pushbuttons become active and flash. The player may now either insert more currency or press one of the pushbuttons to play the game. The player selects the number of credits to bet and this number is shown on the BET meter on the video display. A beep sound is heard when any of the BET playbuttons is pressed. The reels then start to spin and after a short interval come to rest. When the spinning reels stop, the line combinations are evaluated. If the result is a winning combination, a selected win tune is played. The video display shows the number of credits won in the WIN meter. Gamble feature Some games incorporate a win-gamble feature that provide players with the chance to double their WIN amount. This feature is initiated by pressing the GAMBLE pushbutton. The GAMBLE feature may be selected a maximum of 5 times in succession. If players do not wish to gamble their WIN, they may press the TAKE WIN pushbutton. Pressing TAKE WIN adds the WIN to the CREDIT meter.

Revision 01

3-5

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Payout Due to the limit on the number of coins that can be held in the hopper, as well as other payout considerations, there is a limit to the number of coins that the machine can pay out. This is called the Collect Limit and is set via the Operator Mode Menu Operator Setup/Selections Machine Options screen display. A player can collect coins up to the Collect Limit amount by pressing the COLLECT pushbutton. When the COLLECT button is pressed, the machine prevents functions such as gameplay and entry of currency until the hopper has dispensed the coins into the coin tray. The hopper photo-optic detector counts the coins being dispensed. The CREDIT meter decrements to zero. When a player presses the COLLECT pushbutton and the value of the game credits is greater than the Collect Limit: the message Call attendant - Cancel Credit $##/## is displayed ($##.## is the value of credits to be paid out). the attendant hand pays the value of the credits and then resets the machine by turning the Jackpot Key ON then OFF. the message Credits paid out $##.## is displayed on the screen. the CANCEL CREDIT electronic meters and electromechanical meters record the number of credits paid out. the game CREDIT on the screen are reset to zero.

Reserve Pressing the RESERVE pushbutton displays the message MACHINE RESERVED on the screen. This allows players to reserve a machine for a short period. Types of Games Machines generally have one of three game types: multiplier, multiline, and multiline-multiplier (see Figure 3-2). Multiplier - A multiplier game allows a player to gamble more than one credit per game on a single winning line. Each additional credit gambled generally multiplies the value of the prize by the value of the credits staked. Multiline - A multiline game allows a player to specify up to 20 lines on which to bet for a winning combination. Up to 25 credits can be bet on each line. The win total is calculated by adding each of the win lines.

3-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

4 2 1 1 1 3 5 12 14 15 11 13

4 2 1 3 5 12 14 15 11 13

10 6 8 9 7

10 6 8 9 7

18 16 20 17 16 20 17 19
I0017

18

19

Figure 3-2 Centre Line and Multi Line Combinations

3.2.2 Video Display


The video display unit provides high-resolution graphics based on 256 colours. The unit is able to display attractive game illustrations and animations, as well as player messages, operator menus and information displays. The simulated spinning reels take up most of the screen area. The area at the top of the screen displays CREDIT, BET, and WIN information, as well as the coin denomination accepted. Between these two areas is the top message display area. The monitor may be fitted with a touchscreen that enables games to be played by touching designated areas of the screen.

Revision 01

3-7

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

3.2.3 Sounds and Tunes


Sounds and tunes are used, in combination with the graphics and animation, to increase game appeal. Different sounds are played to signify various machine conditions, such as alarm, reel spin/stop, win, lose, double-up win, jackpot bell, coins entering machine, and coins falling to coin tray. Each game has its own specific sounds and tunes. The volume of the sound system can be adjusted in the Sound System Setup menu.

3.2.4 Pushbuttons
A typical layout of the pushbuttons is shown below. The pushbuttons are labelled and have the following functions: COLLECT, RESERVE, PLAY 1/3/5/7/9 LINES, (including RED and BLACK which refer to features of the gamble option), BET 1/2/3/5/10 CREDITS, TAKE WIN and GAMBLE. Each pushbutton has a lamp behind it that may either be lit, unlit, flashing, or flashing at double speed, depending on the circumstances and the machine mode.

COLLECT

BET 1 CREDIT PER LINE

BET 2 CREDITS PER LINE

BET 3 CREDITS PER LINE

BET 5 CREDITS PER LINE

BET 10 CREDITS PER LINE

SERVICE

PLAY 1 LINE RED

PLAY 3 LINES

PLAY 5 LINES

PLAY 7 LINES

PLAY 9 LINES BLACK

TAKE WIN

GAMBLE

NOTE

I0020

Figure 3-3 Typical Pushbutton Layout

3.2.5 Machine Self-Monitoring


Self-test When the machine is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that continues in the background as long as the machine is in play mode. During the self-test, the machine checks the electronic meter data held in computer memory and also carries out an audit calculation using essential meter counts. This self-audit calculation is defined by the formula:
(CASH IN + WINS = CASH OUT + CANCELLED CREDITS + TURNOVER + CURRENT GAME CREDITS).

The memory holds up to three copies of the electronic meter data, METER SET 1, METER SET 2 and METER SET 3. If the data in one meter set does not match that in the other two sets, the data of the two identical sets overwrites the single set.

3-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Security When the machine is in play mode, it continuously operates the following security features: Coin Validator Once in the validator, the coin passes a sensor coil that detects its diameter, thickness, and magnetic properties. Invalid coins are diverted to the coin tray. For valid coins, a CSENSE output signal is generated and the coins are directed past the validator's internal photo-optic detector and on to the coin accept chute. Coins passing the opto detector generate a CCREDIT output signal. For a valid coin to register, a CSENSE pulse must be followed by a CCREDIT pulse. If this condition is not met, a CERROR output signal is generated. This signal indicates a Yo-Yo or a coin blockage condition depending on the width of the pulse. On receiving a CERROR signal, the machine locks up, the error message Yoyo or Coin Optic Fault is displayed on the screen, and the appropriate audit meter is incremented. See Section 3.3.7, Fault Mode - Current Lockup Menu. The position of the coin diverter determines whether accepted coins are directed to the hopper or the cash box. A photo-optic detector is used to monitor the position of the diverter and generates the output signal CDIVPOS. The Coin Handling Interface on the I/O Driver Board converts the output signals CCREDIT, CSENSE, CERROR and CDIVPOS into the form required by the Main Board. The machine software then analyses these signals to determine the validity of inserted coins and to check for fault conditions. If the inserted coin is valid, the appropriate credits are registered in the game CREDIT display and gameplay may take place. The audit meters CASH IN and CREDIT in the accounting menu and the electromechanical meter CASH IN are incremented accordingly. Note that the game display shows accumulations and totals in credits, whereas the electronic meters accumulate in dollars and cents. The electromechanical meters CASH IN and CASH OUT accumulate in dollars and cents but only display to the whole dollar the cents not displayed continue in the accumulation. All coins go to the hopper until the coins in the hopper reach the level detector probe, indicating that the hopper is full. At this stage, coins are diverted to the cash box. The machine software monitors the signals from the Coin Handling Interface and unusual conditions and faults are registered by machine lockup, video messages and increments in the appropriate audit meters diagnostic menus. These fault conditions are COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT, COIN OPTIC FAULT and COIN DIVERTER FAULT. If the machine software indicates that coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cash box, or vice versa, the CASH BOX INSTEAD HOPPER or HOPPER INSTEAD CASH BOX audit meters in the diagnostic menus are incremented. These totals allow adjustment and balancing of the hopper and cash box collections.

Revision 01

3-9

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper. If the hopper is empty and the player is in credit and presses the COLLECT pushbutton, the machine locks up and displays a Hopper Empty message and the audit meter HOPPER EMPTY increments. The hopper is refilled in these circumstances according to house rules, after which gameplay may resume. During a payout, the hopper disc rotates and passes coins onto the coin runner where they are counted by the hopper photo-optic detector. After passing the detector, they are deposited in the coin tray for the player to collect. Also: the COINS OUT electromechanical meter and the CASH OUT audit meter are incremented by the amount paid out. the game CREDIT on the screen and the CREDIT audit meter are decremented by the amount paid out. a payout message is displayed on the screen showing the value paid out. The machine monitors the hopper operation and the photo optic detector checks the coins exiting the hopper. Unusual conditions and faults are registered by increments in the Diagnostic Meters, video messages and machine lockups. These fault conditions are ILLEGAL COIN OUT, HOPPER EMPTY, HOPPER JAMMED, and HOPPER DISCONNECTED. Bank Note Acceptor The Bank Note Acceptor consists of an optical scanning unit and a bill stacker contained in a high-security housing. During operation, the acceptor registers acceptances and rejections. Notes accepted increment the CASH IN electronic meter and electromechanical meter. Detailed information is recorded in the Bank Note Acceptor meters, which may be accessed from Operator Mode / Accounting Information Menu. These meters record the value and quantity of each note accepted. A record is also kept of the last five notes accepted. The machine monitors the bank note acceptor operation and unusual conditions and faults are registered by increments in the Diagnostic Meters, and by display messages and machine lockups. The lockups and video messages are NOTE ACCEPTOR ERROR and NOTE ACCEPTOR OUT OF SERVICE. Should the bank note stacker door be open, the alarm sounds and the message NOTE STACKER REMOVED is displayed. A lockup occurs should the bank note acceptor stacker become full. The lockup description and video message is NOTE ACCEPTOR FULL. The Machine Options menu enables the bank note acceptor to be configured ON or OFF and to recognise specific note denominations. Door Security Up to eight mechanical and eight optical security switches may be used to monitor various door accesses. If a door fitted with a security switch is opened while the machine is powered:

3-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

a DOOR OPEN message is displayed on the screen, specifying which door is open. the alarm sound is heard. the machine locks up, suspending gameplay. the appropriate audit meter DOOR ACCESSES in the Diagnostic menus is incremented. The condition is reset by closing the appropriate door and turning the Jackpot Reset (Cancel Credit) key clockwise and back again. The message DOOR MISMATCH MAIN error indicates a machine fault where the mechanical and the optical door security switches do not agree on the door open status. This condition is cleared by correcting a faulty or poorly aligned mechanical door switch. The security signals are typically distributed as follows:
Security
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Mechanical
Logic cage Top box Mechanical meters ----Main door Bank note stacker ---------

Optical
Main door -----------------------

Note: The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the individual machine configuration.

3.2.7 Electromechanical Meters


The machine is fitted with electromechanical meters (see Figure 34). These meters form part of the comprehensive security system by recording the results of machine operations. Note
The machine will not function if the hard meters are not connected.

The eight electromechanical meters, located at the bottom of the top box, provide a permanent and cumulative record of essential counts. Low boy models locate the hard meters in the electro-mechanical box which sits on top of the cabinet

Revision 01

3-11

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TURNOVER

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 TOTAL WINS

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CASH BOX

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CANCEL CREDIT

Top Box

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONEY IN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 MONEY OUT

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CASH IN

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CASH OUT

Top Trim Electromechanical Meters Monitor

I0191

Figure 3-4 Electromechanical Meters

Note
On delivery of a machine, the meters are not set to zero because of factory tests. Record the initial meter values before using the machine.

These meters are non-resettable and are cumulative for the life of the meter. They provide a permanent cumulative record of: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. TURNOVER: the total of all money bet in all games played. TOTAL WINS: the total number of credits, excluding progressive jackpots, that have been won in all games played. CASH BOX: the dollar value sum of coins that have dropped into the cash box via the coin-in chute plus notes into the stacker. CANCEL CREDIT: the total value of credits that have been hand paid through the cancelled credits procedure. MONEY IN: the value of all money that has been electronically transferred into the EGM from the Centralised Cash Control Equipment (CCCE) (if used). MONEY OUT: the value of all money that has been electronically transferred from the EGM to the Centralised Cash Control Equipment (CCCE) (if used). CASH IN: the total number of credits inserted in the bill acceptor and the coin entry device (whole dollars display and dollars and cents accumulate). CASH OUT: the total number of credits paid out in coin from the hopper (whole dollars display and dollars and cents accumulate).

3-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Meter Security The electromechanical meters are monitored for abnormal conditions, meters cage accesses and meter disconnection. Detection of conditions is actioned as follows: game play is suspended, the alarm sound is heard, an appropriate lockup and operator message is actioned, being selected from: METERS FAULTY, METERS CAGE OPEN, METERS DISCONNECTED. the appropriate electronic meter increments, being selected from: METERS FAULTY, METERS CAGE OPEN, and METERS DISCONNECTED. The condition is reset when the machine condition is cleared, the lockup is removed, and the door is closed. Refer to Table 3-37 for a listing of the Current Lockups.

3.2.9 Audit Meters (Soft Meters)


The audit meters (soft meters) record a variety of details relating to machine operation, gameplay and player interaction, as well as a variety of statistical counts, security events and past games. Players have the assurance that there is a record kept of recent win or pay situations. When the machine is switched on, it automatically initiates a self-test that continues in the background as long as the machine is in play mode. During the self-test, the machine checks the audit meter data held in memory. Some jurisdictions require audit metering data to be stored in triplicate in three separate battery-backed RAM chips. In the case of a meter malfunction, where none of the meters sets match, the machine displays the error message 3 WAY MEMORY ERROR and the machine locks up. This message indicates a serious machine malfunction. Failure in the self audit calculation also causes a machine lockup with the message SELF AUDIT ERROR being displayed. Resetting Metering and Self Audit Errors To clear a metering or self audit error, the memory fault must be rectified and correct operations re-established with all corrupted meters set to zero. The lockup is removed by turning the Operator Key ON, following the on-screen guidance, and then turning the Operator Key OFF to return to gameplay. After recovering from a memory error, some electronic meters are reset to zero. The information held in these electronic meters includes:

Accounting Information Menu items (Jurisdictional, Periodic, Game Replay, Game / Gamble / Collect Statistics). Diagnostic Information Menu items (Diagnostic, Error Log, Panic Log, Bank Note Acceptor Information). Operator Setup / Selections Menu items (Machine Options, Real Time Clock Setup, Sound System Setup, Reel Spin Speed Setup, Layout Setup,).

Revision 01

3-13

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

3.3 Operator Mode


Operator Mode addresses the jurisdictional and accounting/management information requirements, allows the machine configuration to be changed, and facilitates machine testing and fault finding. The Operator Mode Menu is shown below.
Table 3-1 Operator Mode Menu OPERATOR MODE MENU
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Machine Identification Accounting Information Diagnostic Information Self Test Mode Operator Setup / Selections Power Save Mode Current Lockup Play 1 Line - Press to select next item Play 10 Lines - Press to select previous item Play 10 Lines - Press to choose selected item Operator Key - Turn off to exit Main Door is currently opened

(See Note 1)

Instructions are given on each screen to guide the operator through the various menus and options available. Any active lockups are indicated by a flashing message at the bottom of the screen. Note
The following Operator Mode Menus are based on the game Penguin Pays. The menu options, screen displays and instructions may vary slightly with other games.

The structure of the information displays is shown in the following diagram.

3-14

Revision 01

Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure


Machine Identification

Revision 01
Self Test Mode Menu
Diagnostic Meters Lamp Test Machine Options Button Test Coin Entry Test Hopper Test Monitor Test Panic Log Bill Acceptor Information Ticket Printer Log Real Time Clock Setup Sound System Setup Reel Spin Speed Setup Layout Setup Error Log

Operator Mode Menu 1. Machine Identification 2. Accounting Information 3. Diagnostic Information 4. Self Test Mode 5. Operator Setup/Selections 6. Power Save Mode 7. Current Lockup Diagnostic Information Menu Accounting Information Menu

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Save Mode

Operator Setup / Selections Menu

Jurisdictional Meters Periodic Meters Reset of Periodic Meters Previous Replay of JursdctnlPrevious Meters Games Game Statistics

Figure 3-5 Operator Mode Menu Displays - Structure


Sound Effect Test Factory Test
M5S2021B

Current Active Lockup Menu and Help Displays

Gamble Statistics Collect Statistics

Combination Tests Quick Combination Test Printer Test

Machine Modes

3-15

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

3.3.1 Machine Identification


The Machine Identification information provides essential items, such as Denomination, Tokenisation, and Percentage Return. Entry to the information display is achieved by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 1 from the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-2 Machine Identification Display MACHINE IDENTIFICATION
Machine Identification (GMID): Comms Protocol Version No.: Manufacturer No.: Firmware Identification: Game EPROM Id.: Character EPROM Id.: Other EPROM Id.: Base Credit Value: Progressive Levels Supported: CCCE Port (P1): CCCE Transfer Limit: Hopper Limit: Theoretical PRT Max Possible Win Value (MPWV): Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit 332380 0001 01 0200001V Not fitted Not fitted $0.01 0 Not activated $0 $50.00 87.17 500.00 -

Explanation
Unique identification for machine. Communications protocol identification required by LAB. Identification for Aristocrat. Identification for game EPROM. Not used. Not used. The value of one credit. Progressive levels. Port for communicating with subsidiary equipment. Limit of transfer with Centralised Cash Control equipment. Maximum value of coins that can be paid at one time by the hopper. Theoretical percentage return. Number 99 is the standard option. Maximum possible win in one game, disregarding gamble wins.

3.3.2 Accounting Information


The Accounting Information displays provide information for government authorities, as well as additional financial and statistical details, including periodic performance details, game replay, and game and gamble statistics. The Accounting Information Menu is accessed by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 2 from the Operator Mode Menu. Most of the information cannot be altered although some details may be changed through Operator Setup/Selections Machine Options.

3-16

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-3 Accounting Information Menu ACCOUNTING INFORMATION MENU
2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 2.5 2.6 2.7 Jurisdictional Meters Periodic Meters Reset of Periodic Meters Replay of Previous Games Game Statistics Gamble Statistics Collect Statistics Play 1 Line - Press to select next item Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous item Play 10 Lines - Press to choose selected item Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Machine Modes

Jurisdictional Meters The Jurisdictional Meters provide the financial counts of machine activity. Items include turnover, total wins and amounts inserted in the coin entry and the bill acceptor devices.
Table 3-4 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 1 JURISDICTIONAL METERS
Meter Set 1 Turnover Total Win Cash Box Cancelled Credit Money In Money Out Cash In Cash Out Miscellaneous Accrual: Credit: $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 $0.00 $0.00 Meter Set 2 $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 $0.00 $0.00 Meter Set 3 $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 $0.00 $0.00 -

Explanation
Each meter has three sets of recordings that are constantly compared. Differences cause a metering error. Value bet in all games played. Value won in all games played. Value directed to the cash box and note stacker. Value paid other than by the hopper. Not used. Not used. Value of notes and coins inserted. Value paid out by the hopper. Not used Current amount of credit available to the player

Play 1 Line - Press to display next meter screen Reserve - Press to return to previous screen Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Revision 01

3-17

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-5 Accounting Information - Jurisdictional Meters - Screen 2

JURISDICTIONAL METERS
Occurrence Meter 1 Occurrence Meter 2 Occurrence Meter 3 Occurrence Meter 4 Power Up Games Played Games Since Power Up Games Since Door Open Meter Set 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Meter Set 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Meter Set 3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Not used. Not used. Not used Not used Number of power ups Number of games played Games played since power up Games played since door open

Play 5 Lines - Press to display previous meter screen Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Periodic Meters The Periodic Meters screens contain the same information items as the Jurisdictional Meters, but the values held usually relate only to a specified period determined by the club management. To reset the periodic meters, there must be no credits on the screen.
Table 3-6 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 1 PERIODIC METERS
Meter Set 1 Turnover Total Win Cash Box Cancelled Credit Money In Money Out Cash In Cash Out Miscellaneous Accrual: $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 $0.00 Meter Set 2 $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 $0.00 Meter Set 3 $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 $0.00 -

Explanation
Periodic meters show values since the last time the periodic meters were reset. Value bet in all games played. Value won in all games played. Value directed to the cash box and note stacker. Value paid other than by the hopper. Not used. Not used. Value inserted in bill acceptor and coin entry devices. Value paid by the hopper. Not used

Play 1 Lines - Press to display next meter screen Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

3-18

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-7 Accounting Information - Periodic Meters - Screen 2 PERIODIC METERS
Meter Set 1 0 0 0 0 Meter Set 2 0 0 0 0 Meter Set 3 0 0 0 0

Machine Modes

Occurrence Meter 1 Occurrence Meter 2 Occurrence Meter 3 Occurrence Meter 4

Not used. Not used. Not used Not used

Play 5 Lines - Press to display previous meter screen Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Table 3-8 Accounting Information - Reset Periodic Meters RESET PERIODIC METERS
Play 1 Line Press to reset periodic meters

Explanation
This will appear only when there are zero credits registered

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Game Replay The Game Replay screen allows the operator to replay previous games which includes viewing the Credit, Bet, and Win information for those games. The jurisidictional meters for the last two games can also be viewed.
Table 3-9 Accounting Information - Game Replay REPLAY OF PREVIOUS GAMES
No. of games available to replay Replay Game Number 36 2 The system can replay the last 36 games Replay Game will replay one of the 36 games in full

Explanation

Play 1 Line - Press to select next game Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous game Play 10 Lines - Press to replay selected game Play 15 Lines Press for meters of last game Reserve: - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Displays jurisdictional meters for the last two games

Revision 01

3-19

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-10 Accounting Information Meters of Last Game

Jurisdictional Meters of Last Game Played


Start of Game End of Game Start of next Game $75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 0 $1.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -

Explanation
Select the REPLAY GAME option to see the game replayed. The VIEW GAME METERS option shows the states of the game meters for the game replayed. Value bet in all games played. Value won in all games played. Value directed to the cash box. Value paid other than by the hopper. Not used. Not used. Value inserted in bill acceptor and coin entry devices. Value paid by the hopper. Not used Current amount of credit available to the player

Turnover Total Win Cash Box Cancelled Credit Money In Money Out Cash In Cash Out Miscellaneous Accrual: Credit: Occurrence Meter 1 Occurrence Meter 2 Occurrence Meter 3 Occurrence Meter 4 Power Up Games Played Games Since Power Up Games Since Door Up

$75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $100.00 $30.00 0 $1.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

$75.00 $15.00 $0.00 $10.00 $0.00 $0.00 $101.00 $30.00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Games since event Games since event Games since event Games since event

Play 1 Line - Press for meters of the 2nd last game Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Game Statistics This screen provides statistics on Games Played and Money Won for each Line and Bet combination.
Table 3-11 Accounting Information - Game Statistics GAME STATISTICS
Bet 1 1 1 1 1 Lines 1 5 10 15 20 Games Played 215 56 Money Won $21.50 $28.00 Bet 2 2 2 2 2 Lines 1 5 10 15 205 Games Played 50 5 Money Won $10.00 $5.00 -

Explanation
Statistics for each Bet and Line.

(Continues for each Bet and Line amount) Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

3-20

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Gamble Statistics This screen provides statistics on the number of times Gamble or Take Win was selected for different Win amounts.
Table 3-12 Accounting Information - Gamble Statistics GAMBLE STATISTICS
Win Amount 1 4 5 9 10 19 20 29 30 49 50 9 100 - 199 200 - 499 500 - 999 1000 - 1999 2000 - 4999 5000 + Gambled 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Take Win 4 Chosen Won

Explanation
- Statistics for Gamble and Take Win options

Red Red 1 1 Black Black 1 0 Heart Heart 8 4 Diamond Diamond 19 6 Spade Spade 37 11 Club Club 8 0

Reserve: - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

3.3.3 Diagnostic Information Menu


The Diagnostic Information Menu items provide a record of abnormal operational events, such as device faults, security door accesses, and operational logs. The menu is accessed by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 3 from the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-13 Diagnostic Information Menu DIAGNOSTIC INFORMATION MENU
3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 Diagnostic Meters Error Log Panic Log Bill Acceptor Information Bill Acceptor Log

Play 1 Line - Press to select next item Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous item Play 10 Lines - Press to choose selected item Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit.

Revision 01

3-21

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-14 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 1

DIAGNOSTIC METERS
Coin Optics Faults Coin Acceptor Faults Coin Diverter Faults Yoyo Attempts Main Door Accesses Cash Box Accesses Logic Accesses Top Box Accesses Bill Acceptor Accesses Illegal Coin Out Hopper Empty Hopper Jammed Hopper Disconnected Cash Box Instead Hopper Hopper Instead Cash Box Play 1 Lines - Press to display next meter screen Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit 0 0 0 116 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 $0.00 $0.00 -

Explanation
Increments if the software detects that the validator opto detector is blocked, or an inexplicable set of changes occur in the opto detector. Increments if a coin acceptor fault is detected. Increments after five consecutive instances of coins going to hopper instead of cash box, or to cash box instead of hopper. Increments when the coin validator indicates a coin travelling in the upward direction. Increments when the main door is opened. Increments when the cash box door is opened. Increments when the logic security cage is opened. Increments when the top box is opened. Increments when the bill acceptor door is opened. Increments when the machine is not in hopper collect, but a coin passes the hopper optic. Increments when hopper is in hopper collect and two consecutive 4-second attempts to pay out a coin fail. Increments when the hopper optic is blocked for more than 200 ms. Increments when hopper is disconnected (checked every second). Increments when coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cash box. Increments when coins intended for the cash box are diverted to the hopper.

Table 3-15 Diagnostic Information - Diagnostic Meters - Screen 2 DIAGNOSTIC METERS


Mechanical Meters Disc: Mechanical Meters Faults: Mechanical Meters Cage Accesses: Printer Faults: Printer Disconnected Paper Deplated Faults Port P1 Failures: Port P2 Failures: Port P3 Failures: Port P4 Failures: Port P5 Failures: Port P6 Failures: Play 5 Lines - Press to display previous meter screen Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Increments if meters are disconnected. Increments if a short circuit is detected in the meters. Increments if the meter security cage is opened.

3-22

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Error Log Display This screen display shows the date, time, and type of the most recent error messages. The log holds information on the last one hundred errors.
Table 3-16 Diagnostic Information - Error Log ERROR LOG
Event # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Time 26-Mar-0 26-Mar-0 26-Mar-0 26-Mar-0 26-Mar-0 26-Mar-0 26-Mar-0 9.48 9.48 9.17 9.14 9.13 9.10 9.09 Error Type Machine power Fail Main Door Open Main Door Open Bill Stacker Removed Bill Acceptor Door Open Hopper Disconnected Main Door Open

Explanation
Event number 0 is the most recent event and 99 is the oldest. The log registers lockup events only

Play 1 Line - Press to scroll forward by one line Play 5 Lines- Press to scroll backward by one line Play 10 Lines- Press to scroll forward by one page Play 15 Lines- Press to scroll backward by one page Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn of to exit

Panic Log Display Information is recorded in this log whenever a critical error occurs from which the machine cannot recover.
Table 3-17 Diagnostic Information - Panic Log PANIC LOG
User R13 001fffec R14 2340119c IRQ R13 001fffb0 R14 FIQ R8 0c000110 R9 00084100 R10 R11 R12 R13 $14 SVC R2 0000002 R3 0000000 R4 R5 R6 R7 R8 SVC R9 000128d0 R10 ffffffea R11 R12 R13 R14 R15 -

Explanation

Data items are program counter, source module,

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn of to exit

and error description

Information is recorded in this log whenever a critical error occurs from which the machine cannot recover.

Revision 01

3-23

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor Information This screen provides a record of the number of notes of each denomination received, the last five notes accepted, and the total value of notes received.
Table 3-18 Diagnostic Information - Bill Acceptor Information BILL ACCEPTOR INFORMATION
Number of Notes Received $ 1 Notes Received: $ 5 Notes Received: $ 10 Notes Received: $ 20 Notes Received: $ 50 Notes Received: $ 100 Notes Received: 7 60 10 $713.50 77 -

Explanation
Information on notes input.

TOTAL VALUE OF NOTES RECEIVED TOTAL NUMBER OF NOTES RECEIVED LAST FIVE NOTES RECEIVED Last: $5 Second Last: $10 Third Last: $10 Fourth Last: $50 Fifth Last: $50 Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

3.3.4 Self Test Mode


Self Test Mode addresses the repair and maintenance tasks for the MVP machine. The items on the Self Test Mode Menu are designed to test various machine components and features This mode can only be accessed when player credits are zero, the main door is open, and no other lockups are active. The Self Test Mode Menu is accessed by first opening the main door, turning the Operator Key ON, and selecting option 4 from the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-19 Self Test Mode Menu SELF TEST MODE MENU
4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 Lamp Test Coin Entry Test Hopper Test Monitor Test 4.5 Sound Effect Test 4.6 Factory Test 4.7 Combination Test

Play 1 Line - Press to select next item Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous item Play 10 Lines - Press to choose selected item Reserve - Press to return to previous menu

3-24

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-20 Self Test Mode Requirements SELF TEST MODE
Entry to this mode is not permitted unless: (a) (b) (c) Credit is zero Main door is open No other lockups active

Machine Modes

Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Lamp Test This screen allows the operator to test the pushbutton lamps, animation lamps and light tower lamps. The state of individual lamps can be set to either on, off, flashing slow, or flashing fast. The operator can then observe the lamps to verify correct operation.
Table 3-21 Self Test Mode - Lamp Test LAMP TEST
Light Tower Lamp # 1 2 3 4 Win Line Lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 Play Line Lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 Current Function: ON Animation Lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 OFF 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Player Key Lamp # 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 All Tests lamps

Explanation

FLASH SLOW

FLASH FAST

Play 1 Line - Press to select next lamp Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous lamp Play 15 Lines Press to select function (on/off/flash) Service- Press to return to previous menu

Revision 01

3-25

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Entry Test This screen allows the operator to test the coin entry devices. The operator selects the state of the coin validator and coin diverter, then enters coins and observes the changes in the display readings.
Table 3-22 Self Test Mode - Coin Entry Test TEST MODE - COIN ENTRY TEST
COIN ENTRY Reject State: Validator O/P: Optic A: Optic B: CASH BOX Diverter state: Optic A: Optic B: MESSAGE Play 1 Line - Press to change reject state Play 5 Lines - Press to change diverter state Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Play 1 Line not displayed until main door fully opened

Explanation
Tests for coin entry devices. Choose States, enter coins, and observe changes in display readings. Changes to Chip Tray or Internal

Chip Tray Inactive Unblocked Unblocked Cash Box Not Used Unblocked

Changes to Cash Box or Hopper

Hopper Test In this test, the Collect button is pressed to activate a hopper payout of 10 coins. The door must then be closed and the 10 coins reinserted. Any error messages will be displayed on the screen.
Table 3-23 Self Test Mode - Hopper Test TEST MODE - HOPPER TEST
Hopper Test Payout: Coins Reinserted: Last Hopper Event: None 0 0 Door must be closed and the 10 coins reinserted. Any error messages will be displayed on screen. Exit only possible after coins paid and reinserted. If Payout Limit is $0.0, test is not operable

Explanation
Test attempts to pay 10 coins from the hopper after pressing Collect Key.

Collect Key - Press to activate payout Reserve - Press to return to previous menu

3-26

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Video Monitor Test This screen allows a range of tests to be conducted on the video monitor. The parameters checked include picture alignment, distortion, and colour purity. The operator inspects the display to decide whether the tests are passed or failed.
Table 3-24 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Menu VIDEO MONITOR TESTS MENU
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3 3.4.4 3.4.5 3.4.6 3.4.7 Screen Frame Tilt Horizontal Curvature Vertical Curvature Geometrical Linearity Barrel Distortion Screen Regulation 3.4.8 Vertical Regularity 3.4.9 Horizontal Regularity 3.4.10 Red Colour Purity 3.4.11 Green Colour Purity 3.4.12 Blue Colour Purity 3.4.13 Basic Colours 3.4.14 Mode Colours

Explanation
Tests the video monitor parameters

Play 1 Line - Press to select next test Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous test Play 10 Lines Press to choose selected test Service - Press to return to previous menu Press Any Button to complete chosen test

Table 3-25 Self Test Mode - Video Monitor Test Descriptions SELF TEST MODE - VIDEO MONITOR TEST DESCRIPTIONS
TEST Colour Balance Test Grey Scale Test 12.5% White Screen Test Grid Linearity Test Magenta Grid Linearity Test Basic Colours Test Mode Colours Test Screen Regulation Test Red Colour Purity Test Green Colour Purity Test Blue Colour Purity Test Black Colour Purity Test White Colour Purity Test DESCRIPTION Tests the shading of primary colours to confirm the adjustment of colours Tests the colour guns are equal in intensity Displays a slightly lighter colour than black Displays a series of horizontal and vertical lines on the same screen Displays a series of horizontal and vertical lines on the same screen using magenta colour Displays four coloured rectangles - red, green, blue, white Displays the full range of 256 colours available Displays a flashing white box Activates all red pixels Activates all green pixels Activates all blue pixels Activates all black pixels Activates all white pixels

Revision 01

3-27

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Sound Effect Test This screen allows the operator to change the volume of the sound system.
Table 3-26 Self Test Mode - Sound Effects Test TEST MODE - SOUND SYSTEM TEST
-

Explanation
Permits change to volume settings except alarm sound. Plays the range of machine sounds. Changes can be made as test is in progress.

IIIIIIIIIII

Play 1 Line - Press to increase volume Play 5 Lines - Press to decrease volume Play 10 Lines - Press to play machine tunes Reserve - Press to return to previous menu

Factory Test The Factory Test option is for use by Aristocrat personnel The option conducts several tests simultaneously, including coin entry,, coin diverter, door switch, video monitor tests, and sound system tests. At the end, the tests will automatically resume press any key to discontinue the tests. Failed tests are displayed on the screen.
Table 3-27 Self Test Mode - Factory Test FACTORY TEST
Cycle Count: 1

Explanation
This menu is for Aristocrat personnel only

Test Description: Coin Entry Validator Test Time: 02:42:49 Error Type: Error in Door Switch Test

Play 1 Line - Press to start Factory Test Service - Press to return to previous menu

3-28

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Combination Test The Combination Test enables the reel symbols to be seen and the combination positions checked. After selecting a set of finishing positions as a request target (by pressing the pushbuttons, Play 1 Line, Play 5 Lines, Play 10 Lines), the test is activated by pressing the Play 15 Lines pushbutton, then pressing any one of the Play Lines. The resultant game display must match the requested reel positions. A check of the graphic animations and sound displays, applicable to any winning combination on display, can be carried out.
Table 3-28 Self Test Mode.- Combination Test SELF TEST MODE - COMBINATION TEST
KEY Play 1 Line Next Reel Play 5 Lines Step Forward 10 1 Play 10 Lines Step Backward 1 8 Play 7 Lines Go 1 Reserve Exit

Table 3-29 Self Test Mode - Combination Test Result


EXPLANATION Result of combination test, after choosing reelfinishing positions.

Revision 01

3-29

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

3.3.5 Operator Setup / Selections Mode


The Operator Setup / Selections Menu enables the various machine options to be set to individual house preferences. The settings can be viewed and changed by pressing the appropriate buttons. This option is only available when player credits are zero, the main door is open, and no other lockups are active. Entry to this menu is achieved by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 5 from the Operator Mode Menu.
Table 3-30 Operator Setup / Selections Menu OPERATOR SETUP / SELECTIONS MENU
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.5 Machine Options Real Time Clock Setup Sound System Setup Reel Spin Speed Setup Layout Setup Play 1 Line - Press to select next item Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous item Play 10 Lines - Press to choose selected item Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Machine Options Note


Approval from the jurisdictional authority is required before the items in the Machine Options screen can be changed.

The security logic cage must be open to save changes to machine options.

3-30

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Table 3-31 Operator Setup/Selections - Machine Options Display MACHINE OPTIONS


IMPORTANT: These items can only be changed after consulting with the LAB. (The security logic cage must be open to save changes to machine options) MACHINE ID BASE CREDIT VALUE TOKEN VALUE PERCENTAGE VARIATION 99 ENABLE CCCE COLLECT LIMIT HOPPER REFILL GAMBLE HOPPER / PRINTER SELECT VENUE NAME SEIRAL NUMBER HOUSE NUMBER 332280 $0.01 $1.00 (87.17 %) YES $50.00 $50.00 YES HOPPER AAAAAAAA 123456789012 Accept $1 Bills Accept $5 Bills Accept $10 Bills Accept $20 Bills Accept $50 Bills Accept $100 Bills ENABLE BILL ACCEPTOR NO YES YES YES YES YES YES

Play 5 Lines - Press to increment a digit Play 7 Lines - Press to select another digit Play 1 Line - Press to select next option Play 3 Lines - Press to select previous option Bet 1 Credit - Press to save new settings Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Audit Key - Turn off to exit

Explanation of Terms Machine ID: a number between 0 and 999999. Base Credit Value: the value of one credit. Changing this value will reset the jurisdictional meters. Token Value: the value of the coin or token accepted by the machine. Must be an integer multiple of the base credit value. Percentage Variation 99: the Theoretical Percentage Return (TPR) variation; Number 99 represents a TPR of 87.843%. Other variations may be selected. Collect Limit: the maximum dollar value that can be paid from the hopper after pressing COLLECT. If credit amount is greater, a Cancel Credit hand pay must be made. Hopper Refill: the amount of coins to be placed into the hopper when empty. Gamble: enables/disables gamble option. Enable Bill Acceptor: enables/disables the Bill Acceptor. Accept $1-$100 Bills: allows the bill acceptor to be configured to accept specific note denominations. The denominations selected will be illuminated on the Bill Acceptor mid-trim display by the denomination back light.

Revision 01

3-31

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Real Time Clock Setup This screen allows the real time clock to be set.
Table 3-32 Operator Setup/Selections - Real Time Clock Setup REAL TIME CLOCK SETUP
SECOND: MINUTE: HOUR: DATE: MONTH : YEAR: 06 38 13 02 MARCH 2000

Explanation
Sets time and date.

Play 1 Line - Press to choose next item Play 5 Lines - Press to choose previous item Play 10 Lines - Press to increase item value Play 15 Lines - Press to decrease item value Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Sound System Setup This screen allows the sound volume to be set.
Table 3-33 Operator Setup/Selections - Sound System Setup SOUND SYSTEM SETUP
-

Explanation
Sets sound volume. Default level is low.

IIIIIIIIIIIIII

Play 1 Line - Press to increase volume item Play 5 Lines - Press to decrease volume item Play 10 Lines - Press to play machine tunes Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Reel Spin Speed Setup This option enables operators to select either Fast or Slow reel spin speed.
Table 3-34 Operator Setup/Selections - Reel Spin Speed Setup REEL SPIN SPEED SETUP
SPEED : FAST Alters the reel spin speed between fast and low Play 10 Lines - Press to select reel speed Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

Explanation

3-32

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Modes

Layout Setup This option, if available, provides operators the choice of selecting the Normal or the Charcoal background for the game display.
Table 3-35 Operator Setup/Selections - Layout Setup LAYOUT SETUP
LAYOUT : NORMAL -

Explanation
Alters the game layout between normal and charcoal

Play 10 Lines - Press to select new layout Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

3.3.6 Power Save Mode


Power Save Mode enables the machine to be placed in a cost-saving state in which the machine is turned ON, but power is turned OFF to the video monitor and all fluorescent lamps. Game play is disabled in this mode. Power Save Mode can only be entered when player credits are zero and no other lockups are active. The Power Savescreen is shown below.
Table 3-36 Power Save Mode Explanation
Operator Key - Turn off to START Power Save Mode Reserve - Press to return to previous menu without entering Power Save Mode Machine is running but power is cut to the video monitor and all fluorescent lights.

Operator Key - Turn on again to EXIT Power Save Mode. Turn Reset Key to reset lockup detected in Power Save Mode

To exit from the power save function, turn the Operator Key ON. The machine will return to the Operator Mode Menu. Turn the Jackpot (Reset) Key ON and then OFF to reset the lockups detected.

3.3.7 Current Lockup Menu Fault Mode


The Mk4/5XR gaming machine has an extensive system of self-monitoring and automatically enters fault mode when abnormal conditions are detected. In fault mode, the game message area displays guidance information and the game is disabled to prevent any further player interaction. Entry to the Current Lockup Menu is achieved by turning the Operator Key ON and selecting option 7 from the Operator Mode Menu. The menu is displayed and the conditions requiring attention are highlighted by the characters ***. Each lockup condition has an associated help screen outlining the procedure for fixing the fault.

Revision 01

3-33

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The Current Active Lockups Menu is shown below, followed by a summary of the associated help screens.
Table 3-37 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Menu CURRENT ACTIVE LOCKUP MENU
Jackpot Cancel Credit Printer Cancel Credit ***Main Door Open/Mismatch Cash Box Door Open Top Box Door Open Logic Door Open Bill Acceptor Door Open ***Yoyo Coin Acceptor Fault Coin Optic Fault Coin Diverter Fault Cash Box Optic Fault Hopper Empty Hopper Jammed Hopper Disconnected Illegal Coin Out 3 Way Memory Error Self-Audit Error Game EPROMs Changed Meters Disconnected Meters Faulty Meters Cage Open Machine Options Printer Disconnected Printer Fault Paper Deplated P1 - SEF Fail P2 - SEF Fail P3 - SEF Fail P4 - SEF Fail P5 - SEF Fail P6 - SEF Fail Power Save Bill Acceptor Error Bill Acceptor Failed Bill Acceptor Full Bill Acc Stacker Bill Acceptor OOS

The characters *** are next to active lockups Play 1 Line - Press to select next lockup Play 5 Lines - Press to select previous lockup Play 10 Lines - Press to see selected lockup help Reserve - Press to return to previous menu Operator Key - Turn off to exit

3-34

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 3-38 Fault Mode - Current Active Lockup Help Screens CURRENT ACTIVE LOCKUP HELP SCREENS
LOCKUP HELP Screen Explanation and Advice

Machine Modes

3 Way Memory Error Battery #1 Low

To reset this fault, turn the Operator Key ON to enter Operator Mode, and follow the instructions on the screen. Battery low has been detected, to reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. If the same battery is detected low again within the next hour Battery #n is to be replaced. The machine is required to be shutdown as soon as possible (say within the next 15 minutes). As Battery #1 above As Battery #1 above To reset this fault, close the Bill Acceptor Door. To reset Cancel Credit: - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF. To reset this fault, close the Cash Box Door. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault, turn the Operator Key ON to enter Operator Mode, and follow the instructions on the screen. Reconnect the hopper. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. Check if the hopper in empty - if so, refill the hopper. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. Clear the reason for the hopper jam - check the hopper coin out sensor. To reset this fault, turn of the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF. No jackpot currently available on this machine. To reset this fault, close the Logic Cage door. To reset this fault: - Enter machine options setup menu. To reset either of these faults, close the Main Door. With a MISMATCH condition it is possible that either the optic or mechanical door switch is faulty or poorly aligned. To reset this fault: - Close the mechanical meter security cage door. To reset this fault: - Reconnect the mechanical meters. To reset this fault: - Fix the faulty mechanical meter. Bill Acceptor - Communications Error. To reset this fault: - Disconnect then reconnect power to the bill acceptor. Turn the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault: - Empty the stacker. - Disconnect and then reconnect power to the bill acceptor. - Turn the reset key ON then OFF. To reset this fault: - Empty the stacker. - Disconnect and then reconnect power to the bill acceptor. - Turn the reset key ON then OFF. Note Acceptor Out Of Service. To reset this fault: - Reconnect the bill acceptor, then - Turn the reset key ON then OFF, or - Disable the bill

Battery #2 Low Battery #3 Low Bill Acceptor Door Open Cancel Credit Cash Box Door Open Cash Box Optic Fault Coin Acceptor Fault Coin Diverter Fault Coin Optic Fault Game EPROMs Changed Hopper Disconnected Hopper Empty Hopper Jammed Illegal Coin Out Jackpot Logic Door Open Machine Options Main Door Open / Mismatch Meters Cage Open Meters Disconnected Meters Faulty Note Acceptor Error

Note Acceptor Failed Note Acceptor Full Note Acceptor OOS

Revision 01

3-35

Machine Modes

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

acceptor machine option. Note Acceptor Stacker P1 - SEF Fail P2 - SEF Fail P3 - SEF Fail P4 - SEF Fail P5 - SEF Fail Stacker Removed. To reset this fault: - empty the stacker. Replace the stacker. Disconnect and then reconnect the power to the note acceptor. FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P1 To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P1. FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P2 To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P2. FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P3 To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P3. FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P4 To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P4. FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P5 To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P5, then turn the reset key ON then OFF. FAILED SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT FUNCTION - P6. To reset this fault: - Fix cap or equipment attached to PORT P6, then turn the reset key ON then OFF. Exit from Power Save Mode by turning the Operator Mode key ON. The Power Save Mode lockup can be cleared by turning the reset key ON then OFF. To reset Printer Cancel Credit - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF. To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Check looming and reconnect the Printer, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF. To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Power down the gaming machine, - Check the looming and reconnect the Printer, - Power up the gaming machine, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF. To reset this fault: - Open the Main Door, - Remove the Printer, - Insert new paper roll, - Replace the Printer, - Close the Main Door, - Turn the reset key switch ON then OFF. To reset this fault, close the Top Box Door. To reset this fault, turn the reset key ON then OFF.

P6 - SEF Fail

Power Save

Printer Cancel Credit Printer Disconnected

Printer Fault

Printer Paper Depleted

Top Box Door Open Yoyo

3-36

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

________Chapter 4________
Cabinet, Door and Top Box
4.1 4.2 4.2.1 4.2.2 4.2.3 4.2.4 4.2.5 4.2.6 4.2.7 4.2.8 4.2.9 4.2.10 4.2.11 4.2.12 4.2.13 4.2.14 4.2.15 4.2.16 4.2.17 4.2.18 4.2.19 4.2.20 4.2.21 4.3 General Description.......................................................................... 4-3 Technical Description ...................................................................... 4-5 Cabinet Door .............................................................................. 4-5 Latch Bar.................................................................................... 4-5 Keyed Lock ................................................................................ 4-7 Cabinet Security......................................................................... 4-7 Key Switches.............................................................................. 4-9 Bilock Locks ............................................................................. 4-10 Cash Box and Chute ................................................................ 4-11 Logic Cage ............................................................................... 4-11 Game Display Shelf ................................................................. 4-12 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting........................................... 4-12 Cabinet Door Artwork ............................................................... 4-13 Mid Trim Panel ......................................................................... 4-14 Playbuttons .............................................................................. 4-14 Top Trim Panel......................................................................... 4-17 Monitor Mask............................................................................ 4-18 Coin Tray.................................................................................. 4-19 Belly Panel Door....................................................................... 4-19 Belly Panel Security ................................................................. 4-20 Top Box.................................................................................... 4-20 Top Box Artwork....................................................................... 4-20 Top Box Fluorescent Lighting................................................... 4-20

General Maintenance...................................................................... 4-23

Revision 01

4-1

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 4-1 Cabinet and Cabinet Door - General Description................................................ 4-4 Figure 4-2 Latch Bar ............................................................................................................. 4-6 Figure 4-3 Keyed Lock Assembly......................................................................................... 4-7 Figure 4-4 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment ........................................................................... 4-8 Figure 4-5 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement ....................................................... 4-10 Figure 4-6 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features......................... 4-10 Figure 4-7 Play Button Lamps ............................................................................................ 4-15 Figure 4-8 Playbutton - Exploded View .............................................................................. 4-17 Figure 4-9 Top Trim Panel and Monitor Mask ................................................................... 4-18 Figure 4-10 Top Box........................................................................................................... 4-21

4-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

4.1 General Description


The gaming machine cabinet, cabinet door, and top box are of welded sheet steel construction, providing a strong and secure housing for the machine components. The cabinet door features a triple-latch locking mechanism. Security switches may be fitted to the cabinet door, the top box, and other components. The major assemblies within the machine are detailed in separate chapters of this manual. The components covered in this chapter are as follows:

cabinet door latch bar key switches cabinet door security cash box chute logic cage game display shelf cabinet door fluorescent lighting mid-trim, coin entry and playbuttons cabinet door artwork monitor mask coin tray top box door top box fluorescent lighting and reflector top box door artwork top box security

Figure 4-1 shows the major components of the machine.

Revision 01

4-3

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Figure 4-1 Cabinet and Cabinet Door - General Description

4-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

4.2 Technical Description


The following sections describe the function and operation of the individual machine components. Procedures are outlined for adjusting, removing and replacing, and assembling and dissassembling components.

4.2.1 Cabinet Door


The cabinet door is fabricated from sheet steel. Mountings are provided in the door for the lighting system, the coin handling system, the bank note acceptor assembly, the coin tray, the speaker, and other devices. A belly panel is attached to the main door which allows independent access to the bank note stacker. The door is mounted to the cabinet on a full length hinge on the left-hand side of the machine. A latch mechanism locates the door on the right-hand side. The latch bar is operated by a keyed lock. Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the door: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Disconnect all looms between the door and the rest of the machine. Remove the nut and bolt securing the door stay. Disconnect the earth wire. While supporting the weight of the door, remove the nuts securing the hinge to the cabinet. CAUTION
The door is a heavy item; follow the national standard and code of practice for manual handling.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

4.2.2 Latch Bar


To ensure that the cabinet door closes properly, the latch bar mounting may be adjusted as follows (see Figure 4-2): 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Loosen the two lock nuts to allow rotation of the plastic adjustors. Rotate the two eccentric plastic adjustors until the door closes correctly. Tighten the two lock nuts just enough to hold the adjustors securely.

To remove the latch bar: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly for easy access (refer Bank Note Acceptor chapter). Remove the circlip and bearing from the bearing carrier.

Revision 01

4-5

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

4. 5. 6.

Remove the nyloc nut from the earth loom and latch pin and withdraw the latch pin, latch pin flange, and plastic washer. Remove the two nuts and plastic adjustors from the latch bar. Withdraw the latch bar from the door.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

Plastic Adjusting Nut

Bearing Carrier Bearing Photo-Optic Securing Plate

Latch Bar Circlip

Screw

Photo-Optic Sensor

Lock Nut Plastic Washer Plastic Adjusting Nut

I0110

Latch Pin Earth Loom Latch Pin Latch Pin Flange

Figure 4-2 Latch Bar

4-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

4.2.3 Keyed Lock


To remove a keyed lock from the door (see Figure 4-3): Note
The procedure for lock removal is the same for all keyed locks.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly for easy access (refer Bank Note Acceptor chapter). Remove the cam nut and cam washer from the end of the lock. Pull the cam off the lock. Note the position of the cam - it will make replacement easier. Remove the rotation limiting nut from the lock. Note the position of the stops on the rotation limiting washer - it will make replacement easier. Remove the lock nut and lock washer from the lock barrel. Withdraw the lock barrel from the outside of the housing (cabinet door, top box, etc).
Cam Washer Rotation Limiting Washer

Cam Nut

Cam (Top Box Shown)

Lock Nut Lock Washer

I0111

Lock
Figure 4-3 Keyed Lock Assembly

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Once a lock has been replaced, it is advisable to test it with the key to ensure that the cam washer and the rotation limiting washer are located correctly.

4.2.4 Cabinet Security


In addition to the keyed lock, the gaming machine incorporates security monitoring in the form of a mechanical switch and an optical sensor. If both security devices do not provide the correct signals to the Main Board, a machine alarm will sound, gameplay will be disabled, and the appropriate machine lockup

Revision 01

4-7

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

message will be displayed on the monitor screen. The security sensors are monitored by the Main Board when the machine is powered. The mechanical door switch is mounted on the bottom corner of the cabinet, beside the mains switch box. When the door is properly closed, the switch is activated and sends a signal to the Main Board indicating that the door is closed. The optical sensor consists of an emitter and detector. The emitter is mounted to a bracket on the right-hand side of the cabinet on a small bracket. The detector is mounted to the latch bar in the cabinet door. When the door is properly closed, the emitter and detector are aligned and a signal is sent to the Main Board indicating that the door is closed. Adjustment Procedures: If the door is properly closed and a Door Mismatch - Main message appears, then the optical sensor may require adjustment. The emitter may be adjusted as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door. Loosen the two screws fastening the emitter to the bracket on the right hand side of the cabinet. Move the emitter 1 mm in either direction. Tighten the screws fastening the emitter. Close the door and see if the Door Mismatch - Main lockup is activated.

If the optical sensor is still misaligned, repeat the above procedure. Removal and Replacement Procedures: Optical Sensor The optical sensor (see Figure 4-4) may be removed as follows: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Unplug the optical switch looms from the Interface Board. Remove the two screws and the clamp plate fastening the emitter to the cabinet. Remove the two screws fastening the detector to the latch bar (for easy access, remove the Bank Note Acceptor (refer to Bank Note Acceptor chapter)). Remove the optical switch and looms from the machine.

Emitter Cabinet Screw Loom


I0035

Figure 4-4 Photo-optic Emitter Adjustment

4-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

To replace the optical sensor, reverse the above procedure. After replacement of the optical sensor, adjust its alignment as previously described. Mechanical Door Switch To remove the mechanical door switch: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Using a flat-blade screwdriver, prise the mechanical switch from its location. Unplug the switch connectors.

The switch is replaced by firmly pushing it back into position.

4.2.5

Key Switches
The Jackpot Reset and Audit key switches are used to access and reset the machine's software. The key switch functions are covered in detail in the chapter Machine Modes. The key switches are fixed to a common plate mounted to the inside wall of the cabinet. The switches are connected by a loom to the Interface Board which transfers the switch signals to the Main Board for processing. Removal and Replacement Procedures: Removal of the key switches is as follows (see Figure 4-5): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Unplug the key-switch loom from the Interface Board. Remove the two nuts fastening the assembly to the cabinet wall. Remove the key-switch assembly from the cabinet. The individual key switches may be removed from the assembly: a. Unplug or de-solder the loom from the key switch. b. Remove the lock nut and washer from the switch body. c. Pull the switch from the mounting plate.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

Revision 01

4-9

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual


Audit (Operator) Key Switch

Lock Washer (2) Lock Nut (2)

Studs (attached to cabinet wall)

Cancel Credit (Jackpot) Key Switch


I0036

Nut (2)

Washer (2)

Mounting Plate

Loom

Figure 4-5 Key Switches: Removal and Replacement

4.2.6 Bilock Locks


The gaming machines may be fitted with high-security Bilock camlocks and switchlocks with a unique "U" shaped keyway (see Figure 4-6). The locks feature the Quick Change Core facility whereby the keyed core of the lock is fitted separate to the lock barrel. Locks may be rekeyed in a matter of seconds without having to dismantle the lock assembly. To remove a lock assembly, simply unscrew the large nut on the lock barrel and pull out the lock assembly.

Bilock Key

Quick Change Core

Figure 4-6 Bilock "U" Shaped Keyway and Quick Change Core Features

4-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

4.2.7 Cash Box and Chute


When the hopper is full, subsequent coins entered into the gaming machine are collected in the cash box, which is located in the cabinet base. Access to the cash box is via a locked door that may be monitored by a security switch. The procedure for clearing the cash box is controlled by house management. The cash box is not a servicable item. Coins enter the cash box via a plastic cash box chute, which is located at the bottom of the cabinet, next to the hopper. Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the cash box chute: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the hopper (refer to the Hopper chapter). Remove the self-tapping screw securing the chute to the base of the cabinet. Pull the chute from the cash box hole in the cabinet base.

4.2.8 Logic Cage


The logic cage is a steel enclosure with a hinged door in the front. The cage houses the machine logic PCBAs. The door of the cage is fitted with a sliding latch that also allows a security seal to be fitted. The door is fitted with a microswitch used for signalling the machine software that the logic cage door has been opened. In addition, one or two security key locks may also be fitted to the cage door. The logic cage sits below the game display shelf. It slots into the shelf at the back and is fastened to it by three screws at the front. Within the logic cage are brackets and plastic guides for locating the PCBAs. The Interface Board is mounted to the cabinet at the back of the logic cage. When a PCBA is fitted into the logic cage, it travels along the guides and is aligned with the corresponding multi-way connector on the Interface Board. Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the logic cage from the cabinet: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the hopper from the machine (refer the Hopper chapter). Open the logic cage door. The door flips down and is spring loaded to stay completely open. Carefully lever the PCBAs out using the extractors. Standard Electrostatic Discharge prevention procedures should be followed when removing PCBAs. The PCBAs should be immediately placed into anti-static bags. Disconnect all of the looms from the Interface Board. Make sure the connectors are labelled to facilitate replacement. Remove the three screws attaching the logic cage to the game display shelf. Gently pull the logic cage (and the interface board) from the machine; the tabs at the back of the cage will disengage from the shelf.

Revision 01

4-11

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Disassembly and Assembly Procedures: To disassemble the logic cage: 1. 2. 3. Remove the logic cage as previously described. Remove the screws or nuts securing the individual components. The PCB guides are removed by pulling them from their location holes.

Assembly is a reversal of the disassembly procedure. When replacing the cage door catch, care should be taken not to overtighten the bolt as this could hinder the sliding action of the catch.

4.2.9 Game Display Shelf


The game display shelf is a pressed sheet metal assembly that provides both a strengthening cross brace to the cabinet structure and an area on which to mount the video monitor. The logic cage also uses the game display shelf for its mounting. The shelf is is welded to the inside of the cabinet and cannot be removed.

4.2.10 Cabinet Door Fluorescent Lighting


The cabinet door is equipped with a fluorescent lighting system for illuminating the belly panel artwork. Two 6 W fluorescent tubes are mounted on the reflector panel in the cabinet door and are accessed via the belly panel door. Note
Fluorescent tubes are 6 W to 7mm.

Each fluorescent tube is powered by an electronic ballast box, located on the door reflector panel and accessed via the main door. The box is powered by 24 VDC and contains electronic circuitry to regulate tube current and optimise tube starting conditions. It has a connector for the fluoro loom to plug into. Removal and Replacement Procedures: WARNING
The high voltage used to power the lighting system is potentially lethal. Ensure that the machine is switched OFF before attempting to replace fluorescent tubes or ballasts.

4-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

Fluorescent Tube: WARNING


When the lighting system is working, the fluorescent tube and reflector become very hot.

To replace a fluorescent tube: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Take note of the Danger and Warning guidance and act accordingly. Unclip the fluorescent tube and carefully lift it from the lamp holders. Insert the new fluorescent tube and clip it in so that it is secure in the lamp holders. Switch ON the machine, check the lighting system, and close and lock the main door.

Ballast: To remove either of the fluorescent ballasts: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Disconnect all looms from the ballast. Squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to disengage the plastic clips, and remove the ballast from the reflector panel.

To replace the fluorescent ballast, reverse the above procedure.

4.2.11 Cabinet Door Artwork


The belly panel door artwork panel is edgelit by the cabinet door fluorescent lighting system. The artwork panel displays the machine game or paytable and acts as an attraction to players. The artwork is sandwiched between two pieces of polycarbonate which are held in place against the belly panel door by slots along the top and bottom and retaining brackets on each side. Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the artwork panel from the belly panel door: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the main door and switch OFF the machine. Open the belly panel door. Remove retaining brackets from each side of the artwork panel. Carefully lift up the artwork panel and remove from the machine taking care to clear the bottom retaining slot.

To replace the artwork, reverse the above procedure.

Revision 01

4-13

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

4.2.12 Mid Trim Panel


The mid-trim panel is fabricated from sheet steel. The function of the trim is to act as a strengthening brace for the door assembly and to provide an area for the playbuttons and coin entry to be mounted. The mid-trim panel is attached to the door assembly by studs and screws. It can be removed from the door for repair or replacement. Some game conversions on machines require the mid-trim panel to be replaced to accommodate different playbutton configurations. Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the mid trim panel from the door of the machine: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the monitor mask (refer section in this chapter) Remove the bank note acceptor assembly (refer Bank Note Acceptor chapter). Remove the coin handling system (refer Coin Handling System chapter). Unplug all of the playbutton microswitches from the playbutton bodies (refer Playbuttons section in this chapter). Mark each switch for easy identification. Remove the three screws that attach the mid trim to the door. Detatch the mid trim panel from the door.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

4.2.13 Playbuttons
The playbuttons function as the interface between the player and the machine. Various games have different configurations of playbuttons, and the playbuttons themselves may be either square, double square, rectangular, or double rectangular. Removal and Replacement Procedures: Playbutton Lamp WARNING
Lamp and logic looms operate on different voltages - incorrect wiring may damage the machine or cause improper operation. The playbutton lamps are wedge base, 24 V DC, 3 W.

To replace a playbutton lamp, see Figure 4-7: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Grasp the microswitch and lamp holder unit and pull it down, out of the body of the playbutton. Pull out the faulty lamp.

4-14

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

4. 5.

6.

Push in the replacement lamp. Replace the microswitch and lamp holder unit by inserting it into the body of the playbutton, then push the microswitch and lamp holder into the playbutton body until an audible click indicates the parts are locked together. Switch ON the machine, close and lock the cabinet door and check the button lamp.
Playbutton Mid Trim panel

Lamp

2
White Red/Black Grey

Playbutton Body

Red/Grey

Lampholder and Microswitch

Playbutton Wiring
View from underside of playbutton
I0189

Figure 4-7 Play Button Lamps

Playbutton To remove a playbutton from the mid trim panel: 1. 2. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. From the underside of the body, squeeze together the two legs of the playbutton, then from the top of the button (play button legs still together) withdraw the lens/pushbutton assembly. The spring is loose in the playbutton and drops away when the lens/pushbutton assembly is removed. Remove the two self tapping screws securing the playbutton to the mid trim panel. Lift the playbutton from the mid trim panel.

3. 4.

To replace a playbutton into the mid trim panel: 1. 2. 3. Place the body of the button into the correct hole in the mid trim panel. Secure the playbutton with two self tapping screws. Place the spring into the lower section of the pushbutton (between the legs) and hold it there.

Revision 01

4-15

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

4. 5. 6. 7.

Squeeze the two legs together then place the pushbutton into the body of the playbutton. Push the pushbutton down into the body until the legs pop out under the body and hold the spring and pushbutton in place. Place the lamp holder and microswitch into the body and push upwards until the unit clips into place. Confirm that all playbuttons light up correctly (see Chapter - Machine Modes).

If a playbutton does not light up when it should, switch OFF the machine and check the connections and the bulb. Disassembly and Assembly Procedures: To disassemble the playbutton, see Figure 4-8: 1. 2. 3. Remove the pushbutton assembly from the playbutton as previously described. Place a small screwdriver between the lens cover and the pushbutton and prise the lens cover off. Turn the pushbutton upside-down, and the lens and label will drop out.

To assemble the playbutton, see Figure 4-8: 1. 2. 3. Place the correct label between the lens cover and the lens making sure the label is the correct way up. Place the lens cover, complete with label and lens, onto the pushbutton and clip into place. Replace the lens/pushbutton assembly into the playbutton as previously described.

4-16

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box


Clear Lens Cover Printed Label Lens

Push Button

Spring Self Tapping Screw (2 per button) Body

Mid Trim Panel

Lamp

Lampholder

Microswitch

I0185

Figure 4-8 Playbutton - Exploded View

4.2.14

Top Trim Panel


The top trim is fabricated from sheet steel. The trim provides the cabinet door with a top strengthening brace for rigidity. The top trim is removable from the door assembly and also acts as a clamp for the monitor mask.

Revision 01

4-17

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the top trim panel from the door, see Figure 4-9 and: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Remove the four nuts and washers attaching the trim to the door. Pull the top trim panel off the door.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

Top Trim Panel Monitor Mask

Top Trim Panel Screws

Monitor Mask Screws

Gasket

Door

I0131

Figure 4-9 Top Trim Panel and Monitor Mask

4.2.15

Monitor Mask
The monitor mask is moulded from high strength plastic. The mask and a foam tape gasket match up with the contour of the monitor to provide a protective seal against moisture and intrusion. The mask is held in position by screws and the top and mid trim panels.

4-18

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the monitor mask from the machine, see Figure 4-9 and: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Remove the top trim panel as described above. Remove the nuts from the top and right hand side of the mask that secure it to the cabinet door. Gently manoeuvre the monitor mask out of the door.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

4.2.16 Coin Tray


The coin tray provides a receptacle for coins or tokens that are dispensed by the machine hopper, and for coins that are rejected by the coin handling system. The tray consists of several parts which are assembled together and bolted onto the lower section of the door. Removal and Replacement Procedures: To remove the coin tray from the machine: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Remove the bank note acceptor assembly (refer Bank Note Acceptor chapter). Remove the two screws that secure the coin tray to the latch bar bracket. Remove the two screws that secure the coin tray to the cabinet door near the hinge. The belly panel door will have to be open to access one of the screws. Remove the two nuts from under the bank note acceptor holding cradle. Gently pull the coin tray from the door.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

4.2.17 Belly Panel Door


The belly panel door is fabricated from sheet steel and is mounted to the cabinet door on two high-strength hinges. The lock mechanism is located on the main door. To remove the belly panel door: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Remove the two door stays. Remove door by lifting it off the two hinge pins. Note
The hinges and hinge pins can be removed from belly panel door and main door respectively, by removing the screws securing them.

Revision 01

4-19

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

4.2.18 Belly Panel Security


The belly panel door provides access to the Bank Note Stacker, fluorescent tubes and the belly panel artwork. As well as a keyed lock, the belly panel door is fitted with a mechanical security switch which signals the Main Board, when the machine is powered, that the door has been opened.

4.2.19 Top Box


The gaming machine may be fitted with a high boy top box or a casino top box. When no top box is fitted, the machine is referred to as a low boy. The top box provides an area for displaying the game pay table and increases the visual impact of the machine. The top box door is hinged at the top and is opened to gain access to the top box lighting system. Electromechanical meters may also be housed within the top box. A key-operated latch mechanism is used to lock the top box. To open the top box door: 1. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. 2. Insert the top box key and turn it 90 clockwise. 3. Push in the top box latch pin, raise the door of the top box up and push in hinged stays to hold it open.

4.2.20 Top Box Artwork


The polycarbonate artwork panel located in the top box door displays the game paytable and acts as an attraction to players. It is backlit by the top box fluorescent lighting system. To remove the artwork panel: 1. 2. 3. Open the top box as described above. Remove the lower trim from the top box door Gently slide the artwork panel out of the door.

4.2.21 Top Box Fluorescent Lighting


The top box is equipped with fluorescent lighting for illuminating the top box artwork panel. A 15 W fluorescent tube is mounted on the front of the reflector panel inside the top box. Note
Fluorescent tubes are 15 W to AS1201 (IEC 81) standard.

The lamp is powered from the high voltage power control system via a fluorescent ballast, which is mounted to the back of the reflector panel. The fluorescent ballast receives 24 V DC from the power supply assembly.

4-20

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

Removal and Replacement Procedures: WARNING


The high voltage used to power the lighting system is potentially lethal. Ensure that the machine is switched OFF before attempting to replace fluorescent tubes or ballasts.

Fluorescent Tube To replace the top box fluorescent tube (see Figure 4-10): WARNING
When the lighting system is working, the fluorescent tube and reflector become very hot.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Open the top box door as described above. Rotate the tube 90 and pull it clear of the lamp holders. Replace the tube by locating the ends of the new tube in the lamp holders and rotate it 90. Close and lock the top box door. Switch ON the machine, close the cabinet door, and check the lighting system.

Top Box Door

Top Box Door Support Fluorescent Tube Fluorescent Ballast Latch Mechanism

I0190

Electromechanical Meters

Lock and Latch Pin

Figure 4-10 Top Box

Revision 01

4-21

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Ballast The top box ballast is located either in front of or behind the reflector panel. To remove the top box ballast: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Open the top box door as described above. The ballast may be lcated behind the reflector panel. If it is, remove the reflector panel as described below. Disconnect all looms from the ballast. Squeeze the sides of the ballast housing to disengage the plastic clips, and remove the ballast from the reflector panel.

To replace the ballast, reverse the above procedure. Top Box Reflector Panel To remove the top box reflector panel: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the top box as described above. Remove the screws securing the reflector panel to the sides of the top box. Carefully lift the reflector panel from the top box. Unplug the power loom from the fluoro loom.

To replace the reflector panel, reverse the above procedure.

4-22

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Cabinet, Door and Top Box

4.3 General Maintenance


For the general maintenance of the cabinet, cabinet door and top box, the following procedures should be carried out as part of regular machine servicing: Clean the exterior of the machine using a non-abrasive household cleaning solution. Check that the cabinet door and top box door are not damaged. Check that the cabinet earth leads are in good condition and securely connected. Check the condition of the artwork panels. Replace if necessary. Check that the machine security features (eg: cabinet door photo-optic) are functioning correctly and are not damaged. Check the condition of the monitor mask. Replace if necessary. Check the fluorescent lighting system works correctly. Replace any faulty components. Check that all playbuttons function correctly. Replace if necessary. Check that there are no foreign objects in any of the security locks. Check that all doors and latches close and lock correctly. Adjust if necessary.

Revision 01

4-23

Cabinet, Door And Top Box

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

4-24

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly

________Chapter 5________
Power Supply Assembly
5.1 5.2 5.3 5.3.1 5.3.2 Physical Description ................................................................ 5-3 Basic Operation........................................................................ 5-5 Functional Specification.......................................................... 5-7 Input Requirements.................................................................... 5-7 Output Requirements ................................................................. 5-7
Mains GPO .................................................................................................. 5-7 Monitor Output ............................................................................................. 5-7 Generic Output 24 V DC .............................................................................. 5-7 Fluoro Output 24 V DC ................................................................................ 5-8 Output 12 V DC............................................................................................ 5-8 Overcurrent Protection................................................................................. 5-8 Overvoltage Protection ................................................................................ 5-8 Inrush Current .............................................................................................. 5-9

5.3.3

Control Signals ........................................................................... 5-9


Low-Power Mode Signal .............................................................................. 5-9 Power Fail Signal ......................................................................................... 5-9

5.3.4

Physical Connections ................................................................. 5-9


External Mains Switch Outputs .................................................................... 5-9 Off-Line Converter Output............................................................................ 5-9 Fluorescent Lamp Outputs ........................................................................ 5-10

5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.5

Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................... 5-11 Fuses ....................................................................................... 5-11 Power Supply Assembly........................................................... 5-11 General Maintenance ............................................................. 5-12

Revision 01

5-1

Power Supply Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 5-1 Figure 5-2 Figure 5-3 Figure 5-4 Power Supply Assembly Location ....................................................................... 5-3 Power Supply Assembly...................................................................................... 5-4 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram............................................................ 5-5 Low Voltage Power Distribution .......................................................................... 5-6

5-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly

5.1 Physical Description


The power supply assembly provides power to the electronic and electrical devices within the machine. It also performs electromagnetic interference (EMI) filtering and protects the system from adverse input disturbances such as lightning and voltage fluctuation. The power supply metal enclosure is divided into two separate areas by an internal metal bracket. The area on one side of the bracket accommodates the mains filter, switches, fuses, surge protection, the solid-state relay, and wiring between the components mounted to the metal enclosure. The area on the other side of the bracket accommodates the off-line power supply, which consists of a switched mode power converter PCBA. For easy access, the mains switch is located in a separate switch box that is positioned towards the front of the cabinet. The switch box is linked to the power supply box using mains cable. The mains ON/OFF switch controls the power to all equipment in the cabinet, apart from any equipment that may be powered from the general purpose outlet (GPO). See Figure 5-1 for the location of the power supply assembly location and Figure 5-2 for the assembly components.

Power Supply Assembly

Mains Switch

I0043

Figure 5-1 Power Supply Assembly Location

Revision 01

5-3

Power Supply Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

24 V DC Output Connectors for Fluorescent Ballasts

12 V DC Isolated Output 150 mm Power Converter PCBA

Monitor Connector and Fuse

GPO Mains Output, Switch, and Fuse

Ventilation Area used for high-voltage assembly

Mains Voltage Selector

300 mm

Mains Input

Front view 127 mm

View from right

Mains Switch
I0044

Figure 5-2 Power Supply Assembly

The power supply assembly consists of the following components:


Mains switch (located in the switch box). Mains input socket. EMI filter and surge protection device. Switched mode power converter PCBA, internally fused. Mains selector switch. This switch is used to select the correct mains input voltage of either 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC. Generic 24 V DC output socket (connects to the Interface Board to provide power for the low voltage components of the machine). 12 V DC output socket. This outlet provides power for subsidiary equipment. 24 V DC switchable output for the electronically driven fluorescent lighting system. Separately fused, switched mains output for the monitor Solid-state relay for switching monitor and fluorescent lamps to low-power mode.

5-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly

General Purpose Outlet (GPO). This outlet is separately fused and switched and used to provide mains power for any accessories or test equipment that may need to be connected during maintenance.

5.2 Basic Operation


The power supply assembly receives 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC mains input via a standard IEC socket. The mains input is switched, filtered, and surge protected before connection to the monitor and the off-line power supply. The off-line power supply unit consists of a switched mode converter on a PCB. It provides power outputs of 12 V DC and 24 V DC and the control signal Power Fail. The 24 V output is used to power the Main Board, the electronic ballasts for the fluorescent tubes, and all other machine components requiring low-voltage power. The 12 V output is used to power LAB subsidiary equipment or other machine peripherals. A separately switched and fused mains GPO is provided via an IEC female connector. The power supply operation and distribution are shown in the following diagrams:
Mains Switch Box

IEC Socket (Mains Input) Fuse Live Neutral

Zero Cross Switch

Low Power Mode Signal from Main Board

FILTER
Switch

Monitor Output

Ground Fuse Interface Switch Fuse Mains Output IEC Female Outlet Switched Mode Power Converter 24 V DC Ballast Output x 2 24 V DC 12 V DC

I0045

Figure 5-3 Power Supply Assembly Wiring Diagram

Revision 01

5-5

Power Supply Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

12 V DC isolated Low Voltage Output from Power Supply Assembly 24 V DC

Subsidary Equipment

Fluorescent Ballasts

Interface PCB
24 V DC 22.5 V DC 12 V DC 5 V DC 5 V DC isolated +/-12 V DC isolated

24 V DC 12 V DC

5 V DC 5 V DC isolated +/-12 V DC isolated

24 V DC 5 V DC

12 V DC 22.5 V DC

Main PCB

I/O Driver PCB

Machine Components and Peripherals

I0046

Figure 5-4 Low Voltage Power Distribution

5-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly

5.3 Functional Specification


WARNING
The mains voltage selector switch must be set for the correct voltage range before power is connected to the machine. Selecting the wrong voltage will cause irrevocable damage to the machine.

5.3.1 Input Requirements


The power supply assembly is designed to accept a nominal mains input voltage of either 110/120 V AC or 220/230/240 V AC. The mains input voltage defines the monitor outlet voltage and the GPO voltage. The mains selector switch must be set to the correct mains input voltage before power is connected. This switch is mounted on the metal housing of the power control assembly. The input voltage ranges and current requirements are as follows: 220 V AC - 10% to 240 V AC + 10%, 50 Hz at 6 A maximum (198-264 V AC) or 110 V AC - 10% to 120 V AC + 10%, 60 Hz at 10 A maximum (99-132 V AC) Physical Connection Mains input is via a standard IEC socket mounted on the metal housing.

5.3.2 Output Requirements


Mains GPO Voltage and Current +0%, -2% of the input mains voltage at 0 A to 1 A. Physical Connection Mains output is via a standard female IEC socket. This output is separately switched and fused. This fuse is externally accessible. Monitor Output Voltage and Current +0%, -2% of the input mains voltage at 0 A to 1.2 A. Physical Connection The monitor output is provided via a Molex Minifit Junior 6-pin connector plug mounted on the metal housing. This output is separately fused, and the fuse is externally accessible. Generic Output 24 V DC Provides power to the Interface Board for distribution to the Main Board, the I/O Driver Board, and other low-voltage machine components and peripherals. Maximum current is specified considering present requirements and allowing for future flexibility.

Revision 01

5-7

Power Supply Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Vout = +24 V DC +/-5% Iout = 0.5 to 15.0 A continuous Ripple = 200 mVp-p, measured at 0-20 MHz Fluoro Output 24 V DC Provides power for the fluorescent lighting system. Vout = +24 V DC +/-5% Iout = 0.0 to 2.0 A continuous Ripple = 200 mVp-p, measured at 0-20 MHz Output 12 V DC Provides power for subsidiary equipment. Isolation of 3 kV is required between this output, other secondaries and primary. Vout = +12 V DC +/-5% Iout = 0.0 to 3.0 A continuous Ripple = 200 mVp-p, measured at 0-20 MHz Overcurrent Protection Generic Output 24 V - The output is limited to constant output current in the range 17.1 A to 22 A. The response time for the overcurrent circuit is between 20 and 150 ms. Shorter response times can cause malfunction due to short circuit glitches. The power will recover if the overcurrent duration is shorter than the recovery time. If the overcurrent duration is longer than the recovery time, the power supply shuts down and has to be switched off/on for 1-3 seconds to recover. During shutdown state, the output 24 voltage is less than 1 V DC. Current limits are stated for no load condition in the fluoro 24 V output. Generic output protection includes a 2 A current margin dedicated to the fluoro lamps. Therefore, the current limits can be reduced by up to 2 A depending on the fluoro load. Fluoro Output 24 V - The output is limited to constant output current above 2 A. The response time for the overcurrent circuit is specified in seconds. Shorter times can cause malfunction of the electronic ballast and result in the fluoro tube not starting. The output will recover when the overcurrent is removed. Output 12 V - The output is limited to constant output current in the range 3.17 A. The power will recover when the overcurrent is removed. Overvoltage Protection All peripherals connected to the 24 V output rail are protected against an accidental increase of the output voltage. When the voltage rises above 281 V, the entire power supply will shut down.

5-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly

Inrush Current Some peripherals exhibit significant inrush current when first powered. The power supply has to cope with these temporary transients and remain stable. Maximum steady-state current drawn from the 24 V output is 14.45 A. If a Westrex printer is fitted, it causes an additional current spike that increases the maximum current to 17 A. The steady-state current limitation for the output is 17.1 A. Therefore, the off-line converter is capable of handling the current demands of normal machine operation.

5.3.3 Control Signals


Low-Power Mode Signal This signal is generated by the Main Board and is used to switch the machine to low-power mode. Power Fail Signal The power fail signal provides a warning to the system of imminent mains failure. The power supply is designed such that one full missing period of mains (50 Hz or 60 Hz) cannot have any effect on the correct operation of the power supply assembly. The PFAIL signal is generated by the power converter PCBA when the input mains rectified voltage drops below a threshold. This feature maintains the +24 V DC output within regulation for a minimum of 25 ms following a power fail signal. This allows enough time for mechanical meters to finish counting and for the CPU to back up the audit data held in the machine RAM before the power shuts down. After mains voltage recovery, PFAIL can be inactivated when the level of the 24 V output reaches at least 22.5 V.

5.3.4 Physical Connections


External Mains Switch Outputs The mains switch is connected to the power supply box via a 4-pin AMP, Mate-NLock compatible, universal connector. This connector is used for its high current capability per pin. The pin functions of this connector are shown below.
Pin
1 2 3 4

Signal
N ret A ret A N

Comments
Mains neutral line switched Mains active line switched Mains active line to the mains switch Mains neutral line to the mains switch

Off-Line Converter Output Two secondary output connectors are provided: one for the 24 V DC output and the control signals, the other for the 12 V DC output.

Revision 01

5-9

Power Supply Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The secondary output 24 V and the control signals are connected to the power supply assembly via a Molex Minifit Junior 14-pin connector soldered directly to the PCBA. The socket fits into an opening in the metal housing and connects, via a loom, to the 16-way Minifit Junior connector P29 on the Interface Board. The pin functions of the connector are as described in the following table.
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Function
LowPower OUTFAIL output 24 V output 24 V output 24 V output 24 V output 24 V PFAIL output GND24 output GND24 output GND24 output GND24 output GND24

Comments
low power mode (input) Output 24 V correct (output) power for machine, +24 V power for machine, +24 V power for machine, +24 V power for machine, +24 V power for machine, +24 V mains voltage missing (output) ground, +24 V ground, +24 V ground, +24 V ground, +24 V ground, +24 V

The secondary output 12 V is connected via a 4-pin Molex Minifit Junior compatible header soldered directly onto the power supply PCBA. The socket fits into an opening in the metal housing. The pin functions of the connector are as described in the following table.
Pin
1 2 3 4

Function
output 12 V output GND12

Comments
isolated power, +12 V ground, +12 V

Fluorescent Lamp Outputs Voltage and Current 24 V DC 5% at 0 A to 2.0 A for all outputs. Physical Connections Two 24 V outputs are provided to power the top box fluorescent lamp and the cabinet door fluorescent lamps. The electronic ballasts used provide the possibility of daisy chaining the 24 V power rail for future adaptability. Outputs are via 4-pin Molex Minifit Junior compatible connectors, which are mounted on the metal housing. The pin functions are shown in the table below.
Pin
1 2 3 4

Signal
GND 24 V +24 V

Function
ground, 24 V power for fluorescent lamps, +24 V

5-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Power Supply Assembly

5.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures


5.4.1 Fuses
The switched mode power supply fuse is an internal non-serviceable component. If this fuse is blown, the power supply box must be shipped to the manufacturer for service (contact the nearest Aristocrat office). The monitor fuse and the GPO fuse are externally accessible and may be replaced as described below (see Figure 5-2): WARNING
240 V AC mains voltage is present in the power supply assembly even when the machine is switched OFF. The mains input cable must be unplugged before attempting to replace a fuse.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the mains switch and the GPO switch. Unplug the Mains Input cable from the power supply assembly. Remove the fuse cap from the fuse holder by unscrewing it in an anticlockwise direction. The fuse should spring out of the holder. Remove the blown fuse and insert the new fuse into the cap. Insert the fuse cap into the holder, screwing it in a clockwise direction. Do not overtighten. Switch ON the mains switch and the GPO switch. Check that both the monitor and the mains GPO have power. Close and lock the cabinet door.

5.4.2 Power Supply Assembly


To remove the power supply assembly from the machine (see Figure 5-2): WARNING
240 V AC mains voltage is present in the Power Supply Assembly even when the machine is switched OFF. The mains input cable must be unplugged before attempting to remove the power supply assembly.

1. 2. 3. 4.

Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the mains switch and the GPO switch. Remove the hopper to gain access to the power supply assembly (refer to the chapter Hopper). Unplug the Mains Input cable from the power supply assembly. Unplug all other looms and connectors from the power supply assembly.

Revision 01

5-11

Power Supply Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

5. 6.

Remove the screw securing the earth lead from the power supply assembly to the cabinet. Unscrew the two screws that secure the power supply assembly to the cabinet base. One of these screws is positioned below the mains input plug and cannot be removed while the plug is connected. Pull the power supply assembly forward and remove from the cabinet.

7.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Ensure that the earth lead is correctly replaced. Note
Run a complete machine test after replacing the power supply box or any power supply component.

5.5 General Maintenance


The following procedures should be carried out as part of regular machine maintenance:

Check that all connections to the power supply box are secure. Remove any dust or dirt accumulating on the power supply assembly.

5-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Handling Assembly

________Chapter 6________
Coin Handling Assembly
6.1 6.2 6.2.1 6.2.2 6.2.3 6.2.4 6.2.5 6.2.6 6.2.6 6.2.7 6.3 6.4 6.5 6.6 6.6.1 6.6.2 6.6.3 6.7 6.8 Overview............................................................................................ 6-3 Basic Operation ................................................................................ 6-4 Validation ................................................................................... 6-4 Rejected Coins........................................................................... 6-5 Accepted Coins .......................................................................... 6-5 Alarm.......................................................................................... 6-6 Inhibit All..................................................................................... 6-6 Self Calibration........................................................................... 6-6 Diagnostics................................................................................. 6-6 Debris Flap ................................................................................. 6-6 Removal and Replacement .............................................................. 6-7 Clearing Coin Jams .......................................................................... 6-7 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts.................................... 6-8 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor .................................... 6-9 Physical Description ................................................................... 6-9 Basic Operation.......................................................................... 6-9 Removal and Replacement ...................................................... 6-10 Fault Finding ................................................................................... 6-11 General Maintenance...................................................................... 6-11

Revision 01

6-1

Coin Handling Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Handling Assembly ........................................................................ 6-3 Figure 6-2 Condor Coin Validator ......................................................................................... 6-5 Figure 6-3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor ......................................................... 6-9

List of Tables
Table 6-1 Condor Validator Interface Signals....................................................................... 6-8 Table 6-2 Fault Finding....................................................................................................... 6-11

6-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Handling Assembly

6.1 Overview
The coin handling system (see Figure 6-1) consists of a coin validator for determining the validity of inserted coins, a coin diverter and coin chuting for directing the coins to the correct destination, and a photo-optic module for monitoring the position of the coin diverter. The handling system is fitted and adjusted at the factory to suit a specific coin denomination. The coin entry, located on the cabinet door trim, is designed to accept a specific coin denomination for a particular machine. It will not accept oversized or bent coins. The coin entry ensures that the coin is directed into the validator correctly.

Player Coin Entry

Con dor

Condor Validator

Photo-optic Sensor Coin Diverter Solenoid Valid Coin to Hopper

I0193

Valid Coin to Cash Box Rejected Coin to Coin Tray

Figure 6-1 Condor Coin Handling Assembly

Revision 01

6-3

Coin Handling Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The coin validator, coin chuting and diverter solenoid are mounted to a panel on the inside of the cabinet door. Coins inserted into the machine pass through the validator which compares the properties of inserted coins with preset limits stored in the validator software. The validator sends signals to the Main Board, via the Interface Board and I/O Driver Board that allow the machine software to determine the validity of the coins. Accepted coins are directed to the accept chute, and rejected coins are directed to the chip tray via the reject chute. The coin diverter solenoid is powered from the 24 V DC supply. The coin validator receives 12 V DC derived from the 24 V DC supply using a switch mode regulator on the Driver Board. The machine uses the Condor CN133A Validator.

6.2 Basic Operation


The following sections describe the operation of the coin chute assembly.

6.2.1 Validation
The Condor Coin Validator CN133A (see Figure 62) is pre-programmed to accept a specific coin type and cannot be reprogrammed in the field. The validator is clearly labelled with the pre-programmed coin type. Once in the validator, the coin passes a sensor coil that detects its diameter, thickness, and magnetic properties. The validator uses two sets of sensors for coin discrimination: opto and inductive. This combination gives a high degree of security. The inductive sensor pair has been designed to achieve a linear field independent of coin position. In a typical validator, the coin position relative to sensors is critical for accurate discrimination. Two inductive sensors are positioned on opposite sides of the coin path and are switched between in-phase and anti-phase as the coin passes. The network impedance is affected by the coin thickness and conductivity. The resulting amplitude change is measured by a microcontroller and forms the basis of the inductive discrimination. The readings are compared against preset limits stored in the validator. The opto system measures coin diameter. There are three longitudinal IR beams across the coin path. A 16-bit timer uses a 3-point measurement system to obtain a precise measurement of diameter. The resulting calculation of diameter is compared against preset limits. Like the inductive sensors, the opto sensors are part of a closed loop system that maintains very fast triggering for accurate timing. It also ensures that slight variations which occur from mechanism to mechanism (such as component tolerance) are irrelevant.

6-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Handling Assembly

6.2.2 Rejected Coins


If both sets of sensor readings are not within the required limits, the validator rejects the inserted coin and sends it to the coin reject tray.

6.2.3 Accepted Coins


If both sets of sensor readings are within the required limits, the coin is deemed true, the Valid Advance Coin Signal (VACS) output pulse is generated, and the coin accept solenoid is activated. This solenoid is attached to a gate that opens when the solenoid is activated, allowing the valid coin to fall directly into the accept chute. As the coin exits the validator, it passes a photo-optic sensor and a CREDIT output pulse is generated. Accepted coins are directed to either the hopper or the cash box, depending on the position of the coin diverter, which depends on whether or not the hopper is full.

Coin Entry

Locating Pin (4 off) Debris Flap

Connector for Loom to Machine

Accepted Coins Rejected Coins

I0052

Figure 6-2 Condor Coin Validator

Revision 01

6-5

Coin Handling Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

6.2.4 Alarm
If the validator detects a coin travelling in the wrong direction (yo-yo) or a failed or blocked credit or reject optic, an Alarm output pulse is generated. On receiving this Alarm signal:

the gaming machine shuts down an alarm is sounded a fault message is displayed on the screen

6.2.5 Inhibit All


For greater functionality and overall security, the host machine can send the INHIBIT ALL signal to prevent the validator from accepting any coins or tokens.

6.2.6 Self Calibration


The validator automatically recalibrates itself in relation to its environment approximately every 210 seconds.

6.2.6 Diagnostics
At power up, the validator automatically runs a self diagnostic test on the following critical areas:

Inductive Coils Reflective Sensors Diameter Opto Sensors Credit Opto Sensors

If there is a failure in any one of these areas, the LED on the back of the validator will flash red continuously and the validator will not accept any coins until power is removed and the fault condition corrected.

6.2.7 Debris Flap


The CN133A Validator incorporates a debris flap that allows direct access to the coin path for inspection and the clearance of coin jams.

6-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Handling Assembly

6.3 Removal and Replacement


To remove the validator: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Carefully unplug the loom from the validator to the Interface Board. Do not pull on the wires. Push the assembly upwards to the full extent of the top locating groove. This action causes the validator to come free of the bottom locating groove. Swing the bottom of the unit outwards and down to clear the coin chute assembly.

To replace the validator, reverse the above procedure.

6.4 Clearing Coin Jams


When a coin jams in the coin validator assembly or chuting, the machine locks up and displays one of the following fault messages: COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT, COIN OPTIC FAULT, or COIN DIVERTER FAULT. To clear the coin jam, take the following action (see Figures 6-1 and 6-2): 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Carefully clear any coins from the coin chuting. Check for jammed coins in the validator. To remove the validator, refer to the above procedures. Open the debris flap and remove any jammed coins. CAUTION
The debris flap is spring loaded. Close the flap gently to avoid damaging the ferrites and standoffs.

5. 6. 7. 8.

Replace the validator and reconnect the looms. Ensure that the validator and chuting are clear by dropping a coin through while the cabinet door is still open. Switch ON the machine; close and lock the main door. To reset the machine, turn the Jackpot Reset key ON then OFF.

Revision 01

6-7

Coin Handling Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

6.5 CN133A Coin Validator Connector Pinouts


The connector J1 on the right of the validator connects to P12 on the Interface Board. The Interface Board connects P12 to the coin interface section of the I/O Driver Board which receives the signals from the coin validator and solenoid optics and converts them into the form required by the Main Board. For a description of the coin handling interface refer to the I/O Driver Board chapter. The signals to and from the coin validator are shown in the following table.
Table 6-1 Condor Validator Interface Signals

Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Signal
0V VACS Alarm Credit Keyed Pin +12V Inhibit

Description
Ground Generated when valid coin is sensed Yo-yo or optic blocked Generated when valid coin exits validator Power from I/O Driver Board Inhibit signal from host machine

6-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Handling Assembly

6.6 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor


6.6.1 Physical Description
Figure 6-3 shows the diverter solenoid and the photo-optic sensor, mounted on the coin chute assembly.

Figure 6-3 Diverter Solenoid and Photo-Optic Sensor

6.6.2 Basic Operation


The solenoid plunger is mechanically linked to the coin diverter in the coin chute assembly. When no power is applied to the solenoid, the plunger is extended and valid coins fall into the hopper. When 24 V DC is applied to the solenoid, the plunger retracts, causing the diverter to redirect valid coins to the cash box. A tab at the lower end of the plunger interrupts the beam in the photo-optic sensor when the plunger is fully extended. When this beam is interrupted, the signal CDIVPOS to the Driver Board is set to high. In this way, the machine software can indirectly monitor the destination of accepted coins by monitoring the position of the diverter. If the machine software detects that five consecutive coins intended for the hopper are diverted to the cash box, or vice versa, the machine locks up with the fault message COIN DIVERTER FAULT (refer to Table 6-2).

Revision 01

6-9

Coin Handling Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

6.6.3 Removal and Replacement


Photo-optic Sensor To remove the photo-optic sensor: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Remove the Bank Note Acceptor (refer to Bank Note Acceptor chapter). Remove the connector from the bottom of the sensor Remove the screw that secures the sensor to the holding bracket and manoeuvre sensor out of machine.

To replace the sensor, reverse the above procedure. Divert Solenoid To remove the divert solenoid: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Remove the screw that secures the solenoid to the holding bracket and manoeuvre the solenoid out of machine Remove the two spade connectors.

To replace the solenoid, reverse the above procedure.

6-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin Handling Assembly

6.7 Fault Finding


Table 6-2 Fault Finding

Fault
Coins continually rejected.

Probable Cause
Validator fault

Corrective Action
1. Check that the validator has power. 2. Remove any blockage or debris from the validator. 3. Otherwise, replace the validator.

All coins are going to the cash box and the hopper is empty.

The diverter solenoid is not working.

1. Check that the solenoid has power. 2. Check that the coin diverter has not jammed. 3. Check that the hopper probe is not permanently grounded.

Rejected coins not falling into the reject tray.

Coins jammed in the reject chute.

Carefully clear the reject chute.

6.8 General Maintenance


For general maintenance of the coin handling: Coin Validator Open the debris flap and clean the coin path using a clean dry cloth or a soft, long-bristle paint brush. Coin Chute Assembly Check that all assembly bolts and nuts are tight.

Clean the coin chuting with a clean dry cloth or a soft, long bristle paint brush.

Revision 01

6-11

Coin Handling Assembly

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

6-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

______Chapter 7______
Bank Note Acceptor
7.1 7.1.1 7.1.2 7.1.3 7.2 7.2.1 7.2.2 7.3 7.3.1 7.3.2 7.3.3 7.4 7.4.1 7.4.2 7.4.3 Technical Description .............................................................. 7-3 Overview .................................................................................... 7-3 Physical Description ................................................................... 7-3 VFM4 Non-isolated Serial Interface ......................................... 7-10 Installation and Machine Conditions .................................... 7-13 Configuration Setup ................................................................. 7-13 Machine Condition Indicators ................................................... 7-13 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................... 7-15 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker ............................................... 7-15 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly................................................. 7-16 Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams ......................................... 7-16 Care and Maintenance ........................................................... 7-18 Troubleshooting ....................................................................... 7-18 Periodic Maintenance............................................................... 7-20 Video Level Calibration ............................................................ 7-20

Revision 01

7-1

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly............................................................................ 7-4 Figure 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly.......................................................... 7-5 Figure 7-3 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide ...................................................... 7-6 Figure 7-4 Stacker ................................................................................................................. 7-7 Figure 7-5 Typical Mid Trim Layout ...................................................................................... 7-8 Figure 7-6 Input/Output Connector....................................................................................... 7-9 Figure 7-7 Interconnection Diagram ..................................................................................... 7-9 Figure 7-8 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays ....................................................... 7-10 Figure 7-9 VFM4 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages ................................................ 7-11 Figure 7-10 VFM4 Protocol - Hex Code Messages............................................................ 7-12 Figure 7-11 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options ....................................................... 7-13 Figure 7-12 Bank Note Acceptor - DIP Switch Location..................................................... 7-19

List of Tables
Table 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding...................................................................... 7-18 Table 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor DIP Switch Functions ........................................................ 7-19

7-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

7.1 Technical Description


7.1.1 Overview
The Aristocrat Bank Note Acceptor and ancillary items provide advanced solutions for the entry, security, analysis, and accounting of note currency. It communicates with the Main Board via generic serial channel 1 which is connected via P18 on the Interface Board. The full system provides a range of features, including: A bank note acceptor for entry, sensing and acceptance of note currency. The unit is equipped with a microcontroller, RAM memory, and an operating system. It is accessed via the main door. A Stacker unit holds accepted notes in a highly secure environment. It is electronically linked to the bank note acceptor and stores details of machine performance and bank note acceptor processing. It is accessed via the belly panel door. The Aristocrat Dual Cage Assembly houses the bank note acceptor and stacker while allowing note entry to be conveniently placed on the mid trim. The assembly encloses the stacker behind the belly panel door and the bank note acceptor stacker cage door. The illuminated Intelligent Bezel facilitates player recognition of the note insertion area and displays acceptable note denominations. The bezel also provides maintenance error messages for abnormal events occurring in the acceptor and the stacker. Diagnostics information on machine operations and historical details are available through the RS-232 port.

7.1.2 Physical Description


The bank note acceptor (see Figure 7-1) consists of an optical scanning unit linked to a bank note stacker for the entry and storage of a range of note denominations. The entire unit, located within the bank note acceptor dual-cage assembly, is attached to the inside of the main door. The note entry channel is situated on the mid trim, together with the pushbuttons, coin entry assembly, and note-denomination display panel. The bank note stacker is accessed for removal and emptying by opening the belly panel door and then opening the bank note acceptor security cage door. Opening the main door is only necessary should access to the bank note acceptor scanning unit, controls, and indicators become necessary.

Revision 01

7-3

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Dual Cage Catch & Spring Bank Note Acceptor

Bank Note Acceptor Retaining Clip Connector to Machine

Note Stacker Lock (up to 2 Locks)

Bank Note Stacker Door

Bank Note Acceptor Location Pin & Slot

Bank Note Stacker

Dual Cage Assembly

I0068

Dual Cage Location & Pivot

Stop

Figure 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly

Dual Cage Assembly The bank note acceptor is located within a dual-cage housing (see Figure 7-2), which is mounted close to the edge of the main door. The dual cage design ensures the stacker is protected when the belly panel door or main door is opened for maintenance and routine operations. The housing unit is pivot-hinged at the base to improve the various access operations and is held in position by the top catch. Limited access to the scanning channel is possible from the main door when the top catch is released and the top of the entire assembly is drawn back from the main door. Power cable and indicator looms are routed along the main door to the appropriate units.

7-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

Outer Cage Top Catch Locking Latch and Spring Retainer Grooves

Stacker Dual Locks

Inner Cage

Outer Cage

Groove Stacker Lock

Inner Cage Pivot Outer Cage Locating Bar

Cage Door
I0067

Figure 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor Dual Cage Assembly

Bank Note Acceptor Mechanics and Transport The bank note acceptor employs four mounting posts which locate in the dual cage assembly. The main bank note acceptor housing supports and aligns the drive rollers and drive stepper motor while providing mounts for the other subassemblies of the unit. The drive rollers provide power to the drive belts which transport the notes or coupons past the circuitry and out of the unit to the stacker. The two drive belts are individually tensioned to assure a reliable and straight feed. Upper and Lower Guides The upper guide assembly of the Bank Note Acceptor supports and locates the pressure rollers that force the note to the drive belts for traction. It also supports and locates part of the validation circuitry which examines the note as it passes through the unit. The upper guide clips into position on the main unit and is pivoted at its lower end. This allows the note channel to be opened so that maintenance and cleaning operations can be carried out and any jammed notes can be removed.

Revision 01

7-5

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Clip Lower Guide Note Transport Belt and Drive Roller Magnetic Read Head Upper Guide 26 Way Connector (to Machine)

Location Pins Optical Scanners Pressure Roller Bezel


I0027

Self-aligning Connector to Stacker

Figure 7-3 Bank Note Acceptor with open Upper Guide

The lower guide assembly provides the lower half of the note channel which steers the note onto the drive belts and pressure rollers. The lower guide also supports and locates additional validation circuitry and the magnetic read head. The guide assembly is integrated into the housing assembly, and the unit is factory aligned to the upper guide for accurate sensing operations. Bank Note Stacker The stacker assembly (see Figure 7-4) is a sturdy, locked steel box capable of storing 500 stacked currency notes. Access to the stored notes is only possible via the belly panel door and then unlocking the hinged, steel, stacker cage door with a security key. The message DOOR OPEN: BILL STACKER displays on the screen when the belly panel is opened. A further message, STACKER REMOVED displays when the stacker cage door is lowered and the communications link to the bank note acceptor is broken. The stacker features a self-aligning connector that provides electrical connection and aligns the stacker to the bank note acceptor. The interior of the stacker contains a spring loaded pressure plate which supports the note stack and a pair of note support rails on which presented notes lie prior to the stacking operation. The front surface of the stacker incorporates a handle and a clear plastic label retainer.

7-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual


Spring Loaded Pressure Plate

Bank Note Acceptor

Handle

Compartment for Cassette Controls and Electronics

Stacker Drive Mechanism Clear Plastic Label Container Blind Mate Connector and Memory Module

I0071

Hinged Steel Door and Lock

Figure 7-4 Stacker

An upper cavity is created in the box which contains the stacker drive mechanism sealed from the note compartment. The compartment contains a blind mate connector to the bank note acceptor, and the memory module for electronically storing stacker identification, diagnostic and content information. A motor/pusher plate assembly within the stacker accomplishes note stacking. The unit consists of a motor driven, slider-crank mechanism. On receipt of the appropriate signal from the bank note acceptor, the motor turns through one revolution which cycles the pusher plate through one complete linear extensionretraction cycle. On extension, the pusher plate moves the note past the note support rail against the pressure plate. On retraction, the note is trapped below the support rail and held there by the pressure plate. Security The note stacker is fitted with a lock, and two additional locks may be fitted to the stacker cage door. A communications link between the note stacker and the bank note acceptor is monitored by the machine software. When the stacker cage door is lowered to gain access to the stacker, this link is broken and the machine will lock up with the error message Bill Stacker Removed being displayed on the screen. Note Entry Operation commences when a note of a suitable denomination, as indicated on the note entry display, is inserted in the bank note acceptor. The note may be inserted either end first and either face up. The unit grips the inserted note and moves it over the magnetic head and optical system.

Revision 01

7-7

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The note is evaluated and either accepted or rejected. If the note is accepted, credits are issued only after the note has exited the bank note acceptor and reached the security stacker. If the note is rejected, it is returned to the player. A note should only be given three read attempts before it is classed as unreadable.

Collect

Bet 1 Credit Per Line Play 1 Line

Bet 2 Credits Per Line

Bet 3 Credits Per Line

Bet 5 Credits Per Line

Bet 10 Credits Per Line


20

Reserve

RED

Play 3 Lines

Play 5 Lines

Play 7 Lines

Play 9 Lines

Take Win

Gamble

10 5

BLACK

I0066

Figure 7-5 Typical Mid Trim Layout

Electronics Assembly The electronics assembly provides the intelligence that controls all functional, validation, communications, diagnostic, and display functions. The bank note acceptor electronics consists of a microprocessor board mounted on the main board. The assembly is mounted on the electronics tray, which can be removed for repair and replacement. The electronics tray also serves as a mount for a selfaligning connector that electronically connects the bank note acceptor to the stacker. The main electronics board contains the input connector (see Figure 7-6) which connects to the host machine, the top-accessed DIP switch for bank note acceptor functional setup, and the status LED display. Figure 7-7 displays a block diagram of the bank note acceptor interconnection with other assemblies. Microcontroller The microcontroller is a Dallas Semiconductor 5000 configured as an integrated assembly mounted on a SIMM printed circuit board with a 10-year battery-backed 32 kbytes RAM, and a real time clock. The microcontroller runs at 16 MHz enabling a range of advanced functions to be implemented.

7-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

-24 VDC / POWER +24 VDC / POWER OUT OF SERVICE

13 14 15

1 GROUND 2 INTERRUPT 3 DATA 4 $1 CREDIT 5 ACCEPT ENABLE 6 RS-232 GROUND 7 RS-232 TXD 8 RS-232 RXD 9 TTL RXD 10 TTL TXD 11 LED POWER / ANODE 12 ENABLE COMMON

SERIAL / PULSE SEL 16 SEND ACCOUNT NUMBER PROGRAM CREDIT OUT CREDIT COMMON CREDIT RELAY CREDIT RELAY ENABLE IN
I0069

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Figure 7-6 Input/Output Connector

Microprocessor Board
72 Pin SIMM Connector

Lower Guide Optics PCB 2 x 6 Way Connectors Lower 10 Pin Guide Interface Piggy Back PCB 2 x 5 Way Self Aligning Connectors 18 Way Ribbon Bezel PCB 10 Way Ribbon Upper Guide Optics PCB Magentic Read Head PCB

Bank Note Acceptor Main Board

Note Stacker

12 Way Connector Power 12 Way Self Supply Aligning PCB Connector 6 Way Connector Electric Motor

I0070

Figure 7-7 Interconnection Diagram

Revision 01

7-9

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Scanning System The scanning transport mechanics consist of a continuous belt and a pressure roller configuration. The belts are organised to provide an area of optical inspection within the currency channel so that vertical and horizontal inspections are possible. The horizontal analysis is performed by the Side Looking Sensors (SLS) and is used exclusively for the detection of tails and/or strings attached to bank notes or coupons. Any unusual activity detected by the SLS system is cause for automatic rejection and reporting. Stacker Housed within the stacker is a special memory device that has a serial communications interface and is supported by a 10-year lithium battery for nonvolatile memory storage. The memory can be interrogated by a proprietary system when the stacker is inserted into a special purpose external cradle. This facility is not used in NSW. Intelligent Bezel. The bezel assembly is mounted to the uppermost portion of the upper guide assembly. The assembly provides currency alignment and guidance into the bank note acceptor transport mechanism To facilitate the player recognition of the note insertion area, eight green LEDs flash in a runway type effect when the machine is in idle mode. A ninth, red LED flashes if the bank note acceptor operation is inhibited for any reason. Selected green LEDs flash to indicate machine conditions requiring attention. See Machine Condition Indicators in this chapter.

$1 $2 $5
$10 $20 $50

I0089

Figure 7-8 Bezel Assembly Indicators - LED Displays

7.1.3 VFM4 Non-isolated Serial Interface


The serial communication protocol used to interface with the bank note acceptor derives from the Mars GL5 standard and is referred to as VFM4. This interface provides one-way communications with the control system where messages are sent, via the DATA line, from the bank note acceptor to the EGM in response to

7-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

the control lines. Three control lines are used, ACCEPT, SEND (from the control system to the bank note acceptor), and INTERRUPT from the bank note acceptor to the EGM. In normal operation, the EGM activates the ACCEPT line by pulling it low, and the bank note acceptor is ready to accept money. After the validation process, a DENOMINATION message for successful evaluation or a REJECT message for unsuccessful processing is ready to be sent to the control system. The bank note acceptor pulls the INTERRUPT line low and informs the EGM of its intention to send a message. The control system responds by dropping the SEND line low which grants permission to the bank note acceptor to send data. After the SEND line becomes low, data comes out via the DATA line in a serial fashion with 1 start bit, 8 data bits and 1 stop bit, at 600 baud rate. After the control system receives the last bit it raises the SEND LINE high. The bank note acceptor responds by raising the INTERRUPT line high which completes the transmission of the first message.

ACCEPT

T6 T5

INTERRUPT T1 SEND T2 DATA


600 BAUD 8-BIT DATA First message DENOMINATION or REJECT Second message VEND/RETURN if note is accepted Third message if stacker full or cannot stack after note is VEND

T3 T4

I0072

Figure 7-9 VFM4 Protocol - Accept and Return Messages

Should the validation be successful, a DENOMINATION message is sent to the control system which then has to determine whether to accept or return the note. If the note is going to be returned, the control system raises the ACCEPT line after the INTERRUPT line goes high, and keeps the ACCEPT line high for a time. This state tells the bank note acceptor to return the note. The rejection occurs when the bank note acceptor reverses the transport and returns the note with the RETURNED message.

Revision 01

7-11

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

If the control system decides to accept the note, the absence of the RETURNED pulse on the ACCEPT line is interpreted by the bank note acceptor as an acceptance. The note then passed through the transport system to the stacker with the message VEND. In both cases, a second message, RETURN or VEND, is ready to be sent to the control system by the bank note acceptor, and the same timing sequence is repeated for the control lines. The communication session then ends. A possible third message, STACKER FULL or FAILURE (the bank note acceptor and stacker cannot stack a note) can be sent to the control system, and the timing sequence is repeated for the message. The communication session then ends.

GL5 HEX CODE MESSAGES $1 CREDIT $2 CREDIT $ 5 CREDIT $ 10 CREDIT $ 20 CREDIT $ 50 CREDIT $ 100 CREDIT VEND RETURNED REJECT FAILURE STACKER FULL JAM-STACKERLESS SRC STACKER REMOVED SRC STACKER ATTACHED 81H 82H 83H 84H 85H 86H 87H 89H 8AH 8BH 8CH 8DH 8DH 8EH 8FH

Figure 7-10 VFM4 Protocol - Hex Code Messages

7-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

7.2 Installation and Machine Conditions


7.2.1 Configuration Setup
Machine configuration options are established by the use of DIP switches and the Operator Mode Menu settings. Note
The DIP switches are pre-set by the manufacturer and should not be altered.

The main function of the DIP switches is to set the accepted note denominations. They are located at the top of the bank note acceptor housing and are accessible when the main door is opened. The required note denominations must also be set through the Operator Mode Menu. The settings for accepted note denominations are found in the Operator Mode Menu Operator Setup / Selections Menu Machine Options (see 7-11 and refer to the chapter Machine Modes for more information). Disabling of note denominations should be carried out through the operator menu options.
MACHINE OPTIONS
MACHINE ID BASE CREDIT VALUE TOKEN VALUE PERCENTAGE VARIATION 99 COLLECT LIMIT HOPPER REFILL GAMBLE 332280 $0.10 $1.00 87.843 % $50.00 $100.00 YES Accept $1 Notes Accept $5 Notes Accept $10 Notes Accept $20 Notes Accept $50 Notes Accept $100 Notes Enable Note Acceptor NO YES YES YES NO NO YES -

Figure 7-11 Operator Setup Mode - Machine Options

The mid trim provides players with a panel that identifies the accepted note denominations.

7.2.2 Machine Condition Indicators


The bank note acceptors operational details are indicated by the intelligent bezel displays on the mid trim and by several Operator Mode menu displays. The alarm sounds for error conditions. Intelligent Bezel Indicators. The intelligent bezel displays eight green LEDs (2 rows of four, with a wide to narrow shape) which flash in a runway type effect when the machine is in idle mode of operation. A ninth, red LED (behind a circle, slash character, and $ sign) will flash if the bank note acceptor operation is inhibited for any reason.

Revision 01

7-13

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Malfunctions flash different rows of the green LEDs. The pair of LEDs nearest the player is row number 1. The pair nearest the note entry channel is row number 4. The bezel error messages are: Row 1: Hardware fault. Row 3: Jam in stacker. Row 2: Stacker full. Row 4: Jam in currency channel.

Operator Mode Menu Indicators Several Operator Mode menu displays provide bank note acceptor information that addresses note entry history, machine status, accounting/audit/statistics data, and error and lockup information (refer to the chapter Machine Modes for further information).

7-14

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

7.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures


CAUTION
Ensure the power is turned off before any maintenance procedures are carried out on the bank note acceptor, stacker and dual cage doors.

CAUTION
The Bank Note Acceptor is controlled by complex electronics. Unqualified personnel must not interfere with the unit.

A feature of the Aristocrat bank note acceptor gaming machine is the method of housing the bank note acceptor. The unit is positioned within a dual cage assembly which supports the retaining pins located on each side of the bank note acceptor assembly (see Figure 7-1). Electrical connection is through a single connector which supplies both power and communications. The connector is easily accessed from the side of the unit when the main door is open. Connection to the bank note stacker is automatically made through a blind mate connector located at the bottom of the bank note acceptor unit.

7.3.1 Clearing the Bank Note Stacker


The procedure for clearing the bank note stacker is strictly controlled by the house management. The stacker can be accessed and removed independently from the bank note assembly by following the procedures outlined in this section. Removal To remove the stacker: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the main door and turn the machine power OFF. Open the belly panel door. Unlock and pull down the stacker cage door. The lock up Stacker Removed message occurs. Hold the stacker handle and withdraw the stacker from the machine. After the stacker is withdrawn, the stacker door must be unlocked before the notes can be withdrawn. Each stacker may be numbered to assist accounting and control operations.

Replacement To replace the stacker: 1. Lock the stacker door and insert the stacker in the inner cage.

Revision 01

7-15

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

2. 3.

Close and lock the stacker cage door; close and lock the belly panel door. Turn the machine power ON; close and lock the main door.

7.3.2 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly


Removal To remove the bank note acceptor assembly: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the main door and turn the machine power OFF. Remove the 24 way connector from the left hand side of the assembly. Remove the two screws from the bottom of the assembly that secure the locking plate to the cage and remove the locking plate. Unclamp the bank note acceptor outer cage top catch and pivot the assembly forward. Carefully lift the assembly up and out of the machine.

Replacement To replace the bank note acceptor assembly: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Insert the assembly so that the dual cage location and pivot rest on the holding cradle. Push the assembly back ensuring it clicks into place. Reconnect the connector. Replace the locking plate over the dual cage location & pivot and secure with the two screws. Turn the machine power ON; close and lock the main door.

7.3.3 Clearing Bank Note Acceptor Jams


If a jam occurs, the unit is usually able to clear itself within a short period as an automatic process comes into effect. The unit runs the motor forward and then reverses in an attempt to clear the jam. This routine continues for five attempts should the jam persist, a fault message is initiated and a machine lock-up occurs. The scanning and transport channel of the bank note acceptor passes currency in a direct process to the stacker. Should a note become lodged within the scanning channel, see Figures 7-1 and 7-3 and complete the following steps to clear the jam: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Open the main door and turn the machine power OFF. Unclamp the bank note acceptor outer cage top catch and pivot assembly forward. Open the upper guide by pushing it forward to release it from the metal channel clip at the top of the acceptor and remove any obstruction. If this does not clear the jam, the acceptor will need to be removed from the housing to enable complete access to the unit. Remove the connector from the left hand side of the assembly. Unclip the retaining clips, carefully lift up the assembly and manoeuvre it out of the housing; remove any obstructions in the acceptor or on top of the stacker box.

7-16

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

To replace the bank note acceptor: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Close the upper guide and manoeuvre the unit back into the housing so that it rests on the retainer grooves. Secure the unit with the retaining clips. Push the assembly back ensuring it clicks into place. Reconnect the connector. Turn the machine power ON; close and lock the main door.

Revision 01

7-17

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

7.4 Care and Maintenance


7.4.1 Troubleshooting
The following guide provides possible solutions to faults that may be encountered during normal use. Also refer to Removal and Replacement in this chapter.
Table 7-1 Bank Note Acceptor Fault Finding

Fault
Note jammed in unit Note repeatedly skews and jams Display electronics are non functional Note is not transported into the unit

Remedy
Open the scanning channel and remove the note. Pressure rollers have incorrect tension. Belts are not adjusted properly. Make adjustments to the roller tension and transport belts. The bank note acceptor may not be receiving power. Ensure that all leads are correctly connected and power has been turned on. The bank note acceptor may not be receiving power. Reconnect the power. There may be a jam in the scanning channel. Remove the note from the channel. The bank note acceptor has been inhibited from further operation by the game and machine software. Remove any current machine locks. See Machine Modes. The note denomination has been disabled. Check the Machine Options in the Operator Setup menu. If problem persists check the DIP switches (see Figure Figure 7-12.

Low acceptance rate

Perform a Video Level Calibration

7-18

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

DIP Switches
OFF ON 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,10 OFF ON

Bank Note Acceptor

I0127

Figure 7-12 Bank Note Acceptor - DIP Switch Location Table 7-2 Bank Note Acceptor DIP Switch Functions Switch 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF Position Function Enable $100 notes. Disable $100 notes. Enable $5 note. Disable $5 note. Enable $10 note. Disable $10 note. Enable $20 note. Disable $20 note. Enable $50 note. Disable $50 note. No function. Display last 5 notes. Standard mode. No function. Service mode for video level calibration. Normal mode. High level protocol. VFM4 protocol mode.

Revision 01

7-19

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

7.4.2 Periodic Maintenance


The bank note acceptor and stacker require only a minimal amount of maintenance which can be provided while the units are in operating positions. Occasional wiping of the plastic bezel surface is all that is required to remove surface deposits and smudges. A soft lint-free cloth dampened with a 90% solution of isopropyl alcohol is recommended for cleaning. Caution
Caution must be exercised not to flood the bezel area with liquids due to the electronics in the bezel unit and because liquids must not seep down into the bank note acceptor units below the bezel area. Do not use a solvent other than isopropyl alcohol as permanent damage to the bezel assembly and other items may result.

Over a period of time, dirt from the surface of the notes will accumulate on the pressure rollers, drive belt surfaces and bank note acceptor optics. These areas should be cleaned to ensure reliable operation. To clean rollers, belt surfaces, and validation optics, proceed as follows: 1. 2. Remove the bank note acceptor as described in Clearing Bank Note Jams in this chapter. Using a soft lint-free cloth dampened with 90% isopropyl alcohol, wipe the note channel surfaces on both the upper and lower guides to remove any surface dirt. Pay particular attention to the optics area and the magnetic head when removing deposits from the surfaces. On the upper guide assembly, clean the surface of the pressure rollers. The belt surface may be cleaned by using a thumb to rotate one of the drive rollers while holding the cleaning cloth against the surface of the belt. Again, caution should be used to prevent excess liquid from reaching the bank note acceptor internals.

3.

7.4.3 Video Level Calibration


Should the bank note acceptor exhibit an unusually low level of acceptance, a video level calibration can be performed as described below. Video Level reference paper (Part No. CBV-1000) is required for this procedure. Do not use any other paper to perform this procedure. Video Adjustment Procedure 1. Apply power to the EGM and ensure the bank note acceptor runway lights are operating normally. 2. Locate the DIP switches at the top of the bank note acceptor (see Figure 712) and turn DIP switch 9 ON (away from the front bezel).

7-20

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Bank Note Acceptor

Note
Step 4. must be executed within 5 seconds of Step 3.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Open and then close the currency channel. Within five seconds of step 3. above, insert the video level calibration paper into the note entry area. The bank note acceptor will draw the paper in and step it out as it performs the video calibration. The procedure is complete when the paper is fully ejected. Turn DIP switch 9 OFF. Open and then close the currency channel. Test the operation of the bank note acceptor.

Revision 01

7-21

Bank Note Acceptor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

7-22

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper

________Chapter 8________
Hopper
8.1 8.1.1 8.1.2 8.1.3 8.1.4 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.3 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.5 8.6 Technical Description ...................................................................... 8-3 Physical Description ................................................................... 8-3 Basic Operation.......................................................................... 8-6 Functional Description................................................................ 8-7 Hopper Interface Signals............................................................ 8-7 Removal and Replacement .............................................................. 8-8 Removal ..................................................................................... 8-8 Replacement .............................................................................. 8-8 Clearing Coin Jams .......................................................................... 8-9 Disassembly and Assembly........................................................... 8-10 Disassembly ............................................................................. 8-10 Assembly.................................................................................. 8-11 Fault Finding ................................................................................... 8-12 General Maintenance...................................................................... 8-13

Revision 01

8-1

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 8-1 Figure 8-2 Figure 8-3 Figure 8-4 Hopper Location (Standard Disc Hopper shown)................................................ 8-3 Hopper- rear view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)............................................ 8-4 Hopper - exploded view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)................................... 8-5 Hopper Photo-optic Detector............................................................................. 8-13

List of Tables
Table 8-1 Fault Finding....................................................................................................... 8-12

8-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper

8.1

Technical Description

8.1.1 Physical Description


The Mk4/5XR machine is fitted with a short bowl Aristocrat Disc Hopper (ADH). The hopper components and operating procedures are the same as the standard Aristocrat Disc Hopper (see Figures 8-1 and 8-2). The hopper is mounted onto a base plate that slides into the base of the cabinet and is locked in position by a spring-loaded release pin. When the hopper is pushed into position, the socket automatically connects to the plug on the cabinet base. The socket is wired to the hopper PCB, which controls the hopper. The hopper PCB drives a 24 V DC motor, which rotates the disc within the hopper through the gearbox. The motor and gearbox is one assembly and cannot be replaced separately.

Hopper Coin Chute

Handle

Probe

Cover

Bowl

Cabinet

2
I0134

Guide Side Handle Hopper Platform Guide

Spring-loaded Pin
Figure 8-1 Hopper Location (Standard Disc Hopper shown)

Revision 01

8-3

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Photo-optic Detector (Position X) Photo-optic Detector (Position Y)

Disc Housing

Second Coin Wiper Leaf Spring Disc & Spindle Housing Drive Boss Plug Hopper PCB M5 Nut (4) M4 Screw & Washer (2) Motor Drive Pin

M4 Bolt & Spring Washer (4)

Motor/Gearbox Mounting Bracket Gearbox Motor PCB & Loom


Figure 8-2 Hopper- rear view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)

I0133

Hopper Parts The stationary parts of the hopper (see Figure 8-3) are: The casting - with gearbox, side handle, and motor attached. The casting plate - which is bolted to the casting with one fixed and three spring-loaded bolts. The bowl - with handle, internal baffles, coin slider, and probe which is secured to the casting plate.

8-4

Revision 01

Revision 01
Handle Cover Photo-optic Detector (Position Y) Second Coin Wipe-off Spring, Screw, Washer (2) Hopper Bowl Upper Baffle Mounting Fixing Screw (4) Fixed Bolt Lower Baffle Disc Pins Coin Stirrer Disc Spigot Coin Slider Central Spindle Bolt Handle and Baffle Fixing Bolts (4) Disc Securing Screw (4) Floating Disc Support Bearing (3) Bowl Fixing Screw, Washer & Nut (8) Hopper Bowl Mounting Spring Loaded Bolt, Nut Refuse Opening Drive Boss & Washer (3) Hopper Bowl Hopper Platform Mounting

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Photo-optic Detector Position X

Figure 8-3 Hopper - exploded view (Standard Disc Hopper Shown)

Coin Runner Retaining Nut & Washers (2)

I0135

Second Coin Wiper Leaf Spring, Screw (2)

Cover Fixing Screw & Washer (3) Upper Baffle Bowl

Coin Wiper Pawl, Screw & Washer

Photo-optic Dectector (Position Y), Screw (2)

Coin Runner

Side Handle

Probe - Connector, Brass Screw, Washers (2) Insulating Washers (2), Plastic Bush Coin Slide Spring (2)

Hopper Coin Chute

Disc Housing

Hopper

8-5

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The moving parts of the hopper, which are rotated by the motor (see Figure 8-3), are:

the disc. the spigot. the coin stirrer.

The hopper PCB transmits two outputs from detectors:


Output to the Main Board from a probe that detects when the hopper is full. Output to the Main Board from a photo-optic detector, which detects coins as they are dispensed from the hopper.

The photo-optic detector is mounted in one of two positions, Position X or Position Y.

8.1.2 Basic Operation


The hopper holds and dispenses coins. Coins entering the machine are fed into the hopper bowl or the cash box chute through the coin handling system. Coins are fed into the cash box when the hopper is full. The hopper dispenses coins into the coin tray when the player has credits and presses the COLLECT pushbutton. Coins are dispensed via the hopper coin chute which juts out through the slot in the door reflector panel. The hopper can pay out any number of coins up to the cancel credit amount. If the player presses the COLLECT pushbutton when the number of coins in credit is greater than the cancel credit amount, the machine locks up. The credits are paid as a book pay by the cashier, and the machine must be reset using the Cancel Credit (Jackpot Reset) key. If the player presses the COLLECT pushbutton when the number of coins in credit is below the cancel credit amount but greater than the number of coins in the hopper, all coins in the hopper are dispensed. The machine then locks up. The attendant must refill the hopper and reset the machine before the balance of coins is dispensed. If the machine pays out too many coins, or not enough, the machine locks up and cannot be played until the attendant has fixed the problem.

8-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper

8.1.3 Functional Description


Coin Dispensing On receiving a hopper drive signal from the Main Board, the hopper PCB starts the hopper motor. The motor rotates the disc in an anticlockwise direction. As the disc turns, the coins are caught between the disc pins and the edge of the spigot. If there is more than one coin between two pins on the disc, the excess is cleared by the second coin wipe-off spring. The second coin wiper pawl then ejects the payout coins from the disc into the hopper coin chute. For each coin entering the hopper coin chute, the photo-optic detector sends a signal to the Main Board. The coin runner guides the coins into the hopper coin chute. Each coin exiting the hopper interrupts the photo-optic detector which sends a signal to the main board via the hopper PCB and the interface board. The Main Board counts the optic interrupts and when the correct payout number is reached, terminates the hopper drive signal to the hopper PCB. The hopper PCB stops the motor by an electronic braking action. The second coin wiper pawl prevents the next coin from falling from the hopper disc. Hopper Full Detection A probe is fitted onto the hopper bowl to detect a full hopper (see Figure 8-1). When the coins reach the probe, they create an electrical circuit through the coins to ground. The probe is monitored by the Main Board. If the probe indicates that the hopper is full, the software operates the diverter solenoid (situated on the front of the inner door) which diverts the coins to the cash box. The position of the probe in the hopper can be adjusted to alter the maximum coin level. Coin Jamming Prevention A spigot and coin stirrer, which are friction fitted to the disc, keep the coins moving in the hopper bowl (see Figure 8-3). In addition, a spring-loaded coin slider prevents the hopper from jamming due to coin stacking. Two baffles, secured with spring-loaded bolts, control the coin level in the bowl. The casting plate is connected to the casting by four bolts. The top bolt is fixed, but the other three are spring loaded. This is to prevent serious damage to the casting if there is a large coin jam in the bowl. The opening on the hopper casting allows dirt and foreign objects to escape. In the event of a coin jam, the motor will automatically stop and then restart after about eight seconds. If this does not remove the jam:

the motor automatically stops. the machine locks up. the software displays a fault message on the video monitor.

8.1.4 Hopper Interface Signals


The Aristocrat Disc Hopper interfaces with the Main Board via the 14-way Minifit connector P25 on the Interface Board.

Revision 01

8-7

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

8.2 Removal and Replacement


CAUTION
Always use the handle to lift the hopper. Never lift the hopper by the motor and the end of the bowl, as this action may bend the motor spindle.

CAUTION
Avoid handling the second coin wiper leaf spring. If bent, it may cause an incorrect coin payout and the machine to lock out.

8.2.1
1. 2. 3. 4.

Removal
To remove the hopper from the cabinet: Open the cabinet door and switch OFF the machine. Lift the spring-loaded pin. Slide the hopper out of the machine. Lift the hopper by its handle. Note
A Fault Tag must be placed on any faulty equipment.

8.2.2 Replacement
To replace the hopper in the cabinet: 1. 2. 3. Lift the hopper by its handle and slide it into the guides in the base of the cabinet. Ensure that the spring-loaded pin is engaged in the retaining hole. Switch ON the machine; close and lock the cabinet door. Note
The hopper should be tested after replacing. To test the hopper, follow the hopper test procedure outlined in the Machine Modes section.

8-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper

8.3

Clearing Coin Jams


If a coin passes the hopper photo-optic detector when the player has not pressed the COLLECT button or is not entitled to a payout, the machine locks up and displays the fault message ILLEGAL COIN OUT. If a coin jams in the hopper photo-optic detector, the machine locks up and displays the fault message HOPPER JAMMED. CAUTION
Avoid handling the second coin wiper spring. If bent, it may cause an incorrect coin payout.

To clear these lockups, take the following action: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Clear any jammed coins from the coin chute and near the hopper photo-optic detectors (see Figure 8-4). Check that the hopper coin chute is correctly aligned with the slot in the door mounting panel. Switch ON the machine; close and lock the cabinet door. Turn the Jackpot Reset key ON then OFF to reset the machine.

Revision 01

8-9

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

8.4

Disassembly and Assembly

8.4.1 Disassembly
To disassemble the hopper (see Figure 8-3): 1. Remove the bowl assembly: a. Remove the four spring-loaded bolts that attach the casting plate to the base of the hopper. b. Disconnect the hopper probe at the side of the bowl. c. Remove the photo-optic detector and the fixed bolt that restrains the wire to the detector. d. Pull away the bowl (still attached to the casting plate) from the base of the hopper. Remove the two coin runner retaining nuts. Remove the hopper coin chute. CAUTION
If shims are fitted under the coin runner, ensure they are not damaged when removing the coin runner or coin chute. Do not discard the shims.

2. 3.

4. 5. 6.

Remove the coin runner. Remove the second coin wiper pawl. Remove the second coin wipe-off spring. CAUTION
Ensure that the spring-loaded bearings do not fall out from their mountings in the casting when removing the disc.

7.

8.

Remove the disc: a. Remove the centre bolt that holds the disc assembly in place. b. Remove the coin stirrer and spigot. c. Remove the four securing screws from the centre of the disc and withdraw the disc from the drive boss. To remove the motor/gearbox unit (refer to Fig 8-3) and: a. Disconnect the motor PCB and loom from the hopper PCB. b. Remove the nuts securing the motor/gearbox mounting bracket to the disc and spindle housing. c. Tap out the drive pin, and remove the bolts securing the motor/gearbox unit to the bracket.

8-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper

8.4.2 Assembly
To assemble the hopper: 1. Replace the disc: a. Slide the drive shaft end of the disc into the drive boss, ensuring the slot on the shaft engages with the drive pin in the gearbox. b. Insert the four securing screws in the centre of the disc and tighten. c. Place the second coin wiper pawl in position. Insert the screws and tighten. d. Place the second coin wiper spring in position. Insert the two securing set screws and tighten. e. Place the spigot and coin stirrer in position. f. Insert the centre bolt through the centre hole of the spigot and coin stirrer and tighten onto the drive boss. g. Place the coin runner on the two studs. Screw on the two nuts and washers, but do not tighten. Locate the point of the coin runner as close as possible to the spigot without rubbing, and ensure free running of the disc underneath the coin runner. Use shims if required. h. Slide the hopper coin chute under the two bolts holding the coin runner and tighten the nuts. Replace the bowl assembly: a. Place the bowl assembly (still attached to the casting plate) in position on base of the hopper. b. Insert the four spring-loaded bolts into the casting plate and tighten. c. Place the photo-optic detector in position, insert the screw and tighten. d. Place the fixed bolt in position so that it restrains the wire for the photo-optic detector, and tighten the bolt. Note
The hopper should be tested after servicing. To test the hopper, follow the hopper test procedure outlined in the Machine Modes section.

2.

Revision 01

8-11

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

8.5 Fault Finding


Table 8-1 Fault Finding

Fault
Too many coins being dispensed and the machine locks up. Hopper not working.

Probable Cause
The leaf spring holding the second coin wiper pawl is bent or loose. A. No power is supplied. B. Faulty connector. C. Hopper is not in the correct location. D. Motor is faulty.

Action
Tighten the leaf spring fixing screws or replace the spring. 1. Check that power is supplied to the hopper. 2. Check that the connector is not damaged and is correctly seated. 3. Check the hopper mounting spring-loaded bolt is in the correct position. 4. Replace the motor and gearbox assembly. Place the coin runner point as close as possible to the disc and tighten the securing nuts. Also check if the shims are damaged.. Check that the springs are hooked into the hopper spring fixing holes.

Coins jamming at the top of the coin chute.

Coin runner is loose or not in the correct position.

Coins stacking at the bottom of the bowl.

Bottom coin slide springs are not secure.

8-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Hopper

8.6 General Maintenance


For the general maintenance of the hopper, see Figure 8-4 and: 1. Clean the hopper photo-optic detector. Dirt can accumulate on the detector over a prolonged period, resulting in faulty coin counting. Remove any dust from the photo-optic detector using a soft paint brush or by blowing through a drinking straw. Check that the second coin wipe-off spring has not been bent away from the second coin wiper pawl. Replace if necessary.

2.

Hopper Photo-optic

Second Coin Wipe-off Spring

I0179

Figure 8-4 Hopper Photo-optic Detector

Revision 01

8-13

Hopper

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

8-14

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Video Monitor

________Chapter 9________
Video Monitor
9.1 9.2 9.2.1 9.2.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 Ceronix Monitor - General Description................................... 9-3 Technical Description .............................................................. 9-4 Power Supply ............................................................................. 9-4 Adjustment Procedures.............................................................. 9-4 Removal and Replacement...................................................... 9-6 General Maintenance ............................................................... 9-6 Degaussing............................................................................... 9-7

Revision 01

9-1

Video Monitor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 9-1 Ceronix Video Monitor and Control Panel ......................................................9-5

9-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Video Monitor

9.1 Ceronix Monitor - General Description


The video monitor assembly consists of a metal chassis manufactured by Aristocrat, a cathode ray tube from RCA Thompson or Philips, and electronics supplied by Ceronix. For full servicing details refer to the manufacturers manual. The video monitor is a 20" (51 cm) VGA type capable of up to 640 x 480 pixel resolution (the resolution used is 640 x 400 pixels). The major components of the video monitor assembly are the cathode ray tube (CRT), the video monitor printed circuit boards (PCBs) and the video monitor chassis. The monitor assembly also includes an isolation transformer because it can not run directly from the mains supply. The CRT and video PCBs are all mounted onto a common metal chassis that slides along the game display shelf into the cabinet. The video monitor assembly is secured in place by a single screw, inserted from the underside of the game display shelf. The slide-in chassis system enables the video monitor assembly to be removed and replaced easily, and also to connect to the rest of the machine via a single, selfaligning, multi-pin connector on the back of the chassis. This connector transmits the monitor power and the video drive signals from the video controller, which is built into the ARM250 microprocessor. The PCBs associated with the monitor assembly are (see Figure 9-1):

Picture Control PCB Main Monitor Chassis PCB CRT Neckboard PCB

The Picture Control PCB provides for picture adjustment and is located at the front of the monitor assembly for easy access.

Revision 01

9-3

Video Monitor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

9.2

Technical Description
For a full technical description, refer to separate Ceronix service manual.

9.2.1

Power Supply
The Ceronix monitor requires isolated mains input which is supplied by an isolated transformer box mounted on the inside of the monitor chassis. A power supply regulator circuit converts the isolated mains input to the voltages required by the monitor.

9.2.2

Adjustment Procedures
The Picture Control PCB is located at the front of the monitor assembly for easy access. It provides the following controls and adjustments for the monitor picture.

Horizontal Raster size Vertical Raster size Vertical Picture position Horizontal Picture position Video Gain (Contrast)

These controls can be adjusted only to a limited amount. The brightness will be maintained throughout the life of the unit by the auto-brightness circuit. All colours are automatically adjusted by the auto bias circuit and will remain constant throughout the life of the unit. Pincushion distortion is automatically adjusted using the auto bias circuit.

9-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Video Monitor

CRT Earth Strap

CRT Anode

CRT Neckboard PCB

Monitor Chassis

CRT

Main Monitor Chassis PCB

Monitor Self-aligning Connector

Picture Control PCB


I0105

HORIZONTAL SIZE VERTICAL SIZE VERTICAL POSITION HORIZONTAL POSITION MASTER GAIN (CONTRAST)

Figure 9-1 Ceronix Video Monitor and Control Panel

Revision 01

9-5

Video Monitor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

9.3 Removal and Replacement


To remove the monitor assembly from the machine: WARNING
High voltages are present at the rear of the monitor when the machine is ON. Switch OFF the machine before removing the monitor.

WARNING
The monitor assembly is a heavy item (approximately 20 kg). Care should be taken when removing the monitor assembly to prevent personal injury or damage to the monitor.

To remove the monitor: 1. 2. 3. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Remove the two bolts from the underside of the game display shelf. Gently pull the monitor assembly from the machine. The steel frame of the monitor assembly has openings at either side to facilitate handling.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

9.4

General Maintenance
For general maintenance of the video monitor: Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces. Clean the monitor screen with a soft cloth and suitable cleaning agents. Check that all connectors are secure. Check that all monitor assembly PCBs are secure and properly connected. Check that the monitor and monitor mask fit correctly when the cabinet door is closed.

9-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Video Monitor

9.5

Degaussing
Magnetic interference can cause colour aberrations on the monitor screen. To restore the colour purity of the monitor picture, the monitor and cabinet need to be degaussed. Note that the monitor colour aberrations can occur due to normal delivery movements, installation operations, and through leaving the main door open during power-up processes. The monitor assembly is fitted with an automatic degaussing coil and circuitry that emits a degaussing pulse during power up, provided the machine has been without power for 30 minutes. This time delay enables the circuit varistors to cool sufficiently and create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous content and the cabinet. To carry out degaussing: 1. Power down the machine and wait for a 30-minute period to elapse. This time delay enables the monitor circuit varistors to cool sufficiently and create enough energy to degauss both the monitor's ferrous content and that of the cabinet. Power up the machine and close the door within 5 seconds. Automatic degaussing will now occur. If the aberration persists due to the presence of a particularly strong magnetic field, it will be necessary to make use of a degaussing wand. Follow the standard field procedures for degaussing-wand usage.

2. 3.

Revision 01

9-7

Video Monitor

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

9-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Electromechanical Meters

______Chapter 10______
Electromechanical Meters
10.1 10.2 10.2.1 10.2.2 10.2.3 10.2.4 10.2.5 10.2.6 10.2.7 10.3 10.4 10.5 General Description ............................................................... 10-3 Functional Description .......................................................... 10-4 Serial Interface ......................................................................... 10-4 Overcurrent Protection ............................................................. 10-5 Meter Drive Outputs ................................................................. 10-5 PCB Expansion ........................................................................ 10-5 Light Tower Interface ............................................................... 10-5 Security Interface ..................................................................... 10-5 Meter Detection ........................................................................ 10-5 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................... 10-7 Connector Pin Assignment ................................................... 10-8 General Maintenance ........................................................... 10-10

Revision 01

10-1

Electromechanical Meters

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures:
Figure 10-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location ................................................10-3 Figure 10-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram .........................10-4 Figure 10-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder Sides ...............................................................................................................10-6

List of Tables
Table 10-1 Table 10-2 Table 10-3 Table 10-4 Table 10-5 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board ......................................................10-8 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface ................................................................10-8 J3 - Additional Meters Interface...................................................................10-9 J4 - Light Tower Interface............................................................................10-9 S1 - Security Interface.................................................................................10-9

10-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Electromechanical Meters

10.1 General Description


The Electromechanical Meter Board is mounted to the reflector panel in the top box (see Figure 10-1) or in the low boy meter cover when there is no top box. It is a conventional double sided PCB connected to the Main Board using a 26-way ribbon cable via the Interface Board. The PCB provides physical location for up to nine electromechanical meters and connection for a further seven. (For a listing of the function of the meters, refer to Chapter 3, Machine Modes). There are 16 meter outputs which can be configured to drive various components. Eight outputs are used for the standard set of meters. The ninth drive is reserved. The remaining seven outputs are open to configuration. The PCB also acts as an interface for security, meter drive outputs and a light tower, if used. Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations For further information and for reference, the following additional information on the Electromechanical Meter Board is provided in Volume II:

Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams. I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

Top Box

Top Trim Electromechanical Meters PCB Monitor

Figure 10-1 Electromechanical Meter Board - Location

Revision 01

10-3

Electromechanical Meters

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

10.2 Functional Description


The functions provided by the Electromechanical Meter Board are as follows (see Block Diagram Figure 10-2):

Serially interface up to nine electromechanical meters with the Main Board. Provide overcurrent protection to the meter drivers. Allow connection to meter drive outputs, backwards compatible with previous gaming machine models. Expandable for up to another seven electromechanical meters. Interface to light tower lamps. Interface to electromechanical meters security. Capability for detecting meters connected/disconnected. Capable of being configured for less than nine electromechanical meters; allows depopulation of the board.

6-Way Loom 7-Way Loom Serial Interface Interface Board and Main Board 26-Way Ribbon Cable S1 Electromechanical Meter Board J2 10-Way Ribbon Cable J4

Light Tower

Security Interface

J1 J3

Meter Drive Outputs M1 - M6

10-Way Ribbon Cable


Mk5V130.CDR

Optional

Additional Meters (7 Max.)

Figure 10-2 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Block Diagram

10.2.1 Serial Interface


The Electromechanical Meter Board communicates with the Main Board logic via the Interface Board. The Main Board sends a stream of data, clocked to the chip, to the Electromechanical Meter Board. The PCB circuitry reads the data and increments the appropriate meter. The logic signals from the Main Board are optically coupled. The interface also allows for data from the Electromechanical Meter Board to be sent to the Main Board logic in the event of meter failure, disconnection or security access. Connection is via a 26-way ribbon cable header to connector P6 on the Interface Board.

10-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Electromechanical Meters

10.2.2 Overcurrent Protection


An 'intelligent' power switch is used for switching power on and off through the meter drive outputs. The power switch used incorporates built-in overcurrent sensing and protection. The Texas Instruments TPIC2802 Intelligent-Power switch with over-current protection is used. Power supply provides 24 VDC 5% for lamps (Is = 1A) and 5 VDC 5% for logic (regulated) (Icc = 100 mA). The logic signals are optically coupled from the main board and the inputs are connected via a Schmitt Trigger. The baud rate (bit clock) of the SPI is 8KHz 20%.

10.2.3 Meter Drive Outputs


The meter drive output interface allows the connection of systems requiring electromechanical meters drive pulses for audit functions. DACOM systems may be connected to the machine in this way. Connection is via a 10-way ribbon cable header.

10.2.4 PCB Expansion


An expansion interface has been incorporated into the PCB design to allow an additional set of up to seven electromechanical meters. These meters can be configured through the machine software to identify various machine functions. Connection is via a 10-way ribbon cable header.

10.2.5 Light Tower Interface


When a light tower is used, it is connected to the machine via the interface with the Electromechanical Meter Board. The PCB directs the lamp control signals from the Main Board logic (via the Interface Board) to the light tower lamps through four of the extra seven meter drive outputs. Connection is via a 6-way wafer connector.

10.2.6 Security Interface


The security interface provides a connection for the Electromechanical Meter Board to a mechanical security switch for monitoring meter accesses. Connection is via a 7-way wafer connector.

10.2.7 Meter Detection


Data received from the Main Board logic is written to an output chip and then read back. If there is a discrepancy between the initial data written and the data read back, there is a fault. The Electromechanical Meter Board will then inform the Main Board logic of a malfunction.

Revision 01

10-5

Electromechanical Meters

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Figure 10-3 Electromechanical Meter Board - 410366 Component and Solder Sides

Optional Mechanical Security Switch

10-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Electromechanical Meters

10.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures


CAUTION
When handling electrostatic devices (ESDs) such as PCBs, take care to avoid physical contact with components. Handle PCBs by their edges. Do not place ESD items on metal surfaces. When handling PCBs, take care to avoid flexing the PCB. Flexing may cause physical damage.

From the Top Box To remove the Electromechanical Meter Board from the top box: 1. 2. 3. 4. Open the cabinet door, and turn OFF the machine. Remove the top box door and reflector panel (refer to the chapter - Cabinet, Door and Top Box). Disconnect the looms from the Electromechanical Meter Board. Remove the screws securing the board.

Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure.

Revision 01

10-7

Electromechanical Meters

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

10.4 Connector Pin Assignment


Table 10-1 J1 - Main Connector to Interface Board Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Pin Name
P24VA GND P24VA GND /ESPIDIN2 GNDA ESPIRST2 GNDA /ESIOE2 VCC ESCLK GNDA /ESPIDOUT GNDA GND VCC MSS2 GNDA MSSO2 GNDA EMCS2 GNDA OPRIS2 GNDA GND

Function
+24V Ground +24V Ground Data from meter board Isolated ground Reset signal to meter board Isolated ground Strobe signal to meter board +5V from main board, converted from 24V Serial clock Isolated ground Data output to meter board Isolated ground Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NC Isolated ground Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO Isolated ground Emitter 2 Drive signal, security 2 Isolated ground Receiver 2 Sense signal, security 2 Isolated ground Ground ---

Table 10-2 J2 - Meter Drive Output Interface Pin


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Signal Name
Meter5 Meter6 Meter4 GND Meter1 Meter2 +24VDC Meter3 +24VDC

Description
Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Ground. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. --Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. + 24V DC supply. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. + 24V DC supply.

10-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 10-3 J3 - Additional Meters Interface Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Electromechanical Meters

Signal
Meter10 Meter11 Meter12 Meter13 Meter14 Meter15 Meter16 +24VDC GND +24VDC

Description
Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. + 24V DC supply. Ground. + 24V DC supply.

Table 10-4 J4 - Light Tower Interface Pin


1 2 3 4 5 6

Signal Name
+24VDC Top lamp Second lamp Third lamp Fourth lamp +24VDC

Description
+ 24V DC supply. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. Open collector, active 'low' Vsat 1.8V, 1A max. + 24V DC supply.

Table 10-5 S1 - Security Interface Pin


1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Signal Name
MSS2 GND MSS02 EMCS2 GND OPRIS2 GND

Description
Mechanical switch, contact - NC. Ground. Mechanical switch, contact - NO. Opto LED enable signal. Ground. Opto detector signal. Ground.

Revision 01

10-9

Electromechanical Meters

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

10.5 General Maintenance


CAUTION
Do not attempt component level repair without access to a workshop facility.

For general maintenance of the Electromechanical Meter Board:


Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces. Check that all connectors are in good condition and are secure.

10-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

________Chapter 11________
Main Board
410389 - double sided or 410448 single sided
11.1 11.2 Introduction..................................................................................... 11-4 Physical Description ...................................................................... 11-5 11.2.1 11.3 11.3.1 11.4 11.4.1 11.4.2 11.4.3 11.4.4 11.4.5 11.4.6 11.4.7 11.4.8 11.4.9 11.4.10 11.4.11 11.4.12 11.4.13 11.4.14 11.4.15 11.4.16 Diagrams and Component Locations ....................................... 11-5 Functional Description.................................................................. 11-6 Main Board Functions .............................................................. 11-7 Technical Description ................................................................... 11-8 ARM250 Microprocessor........................................................ 11-10 Sound..................................................................................... 11-11 Video ...................................................................................... 11-12 Reset...................................................................................... 11-12 Debug (Keyboard) Port .......................................................... 11-13 Debugging .............................................................................. 11-13 External I/O Expansion........................................................... 11-14 Mikohn Link Progressive Interface (where fitted) ................... 11-14 Memory .................................................................................. 11-15 Real Time Clock..................................................................... 11-16 Battery Backup Circuit............................................................ 11-16 Power Control Interface.......................................................... 11-17 SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry ................................ 11-18 Printer and Mechanical Meters............................................... 11-19 Mechanical Switches.............................................................. 11-19 Security .................................................................................. 11-19

Revision 01

11-1

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.4.17 11.4.18 11.4.19 11.4.20 11.4.21 11.5 11.6

Coin Handling System ............................................................ 11-20 Hopper Interface..................................................................... 11-21 Serial Channels ...................................................................... 11-21 Bank Note Acceptor ............................................................... 11-22 Interface Board....................................................................... 11-22

Removal and Replacement Procedures..................................... 11-23 Description of Connectors ........................................................... 11-24 11.6.1 11.6.2 11.6.3 11.6.4 Communications Configuration Board.................................... 11-24 Optically Isolated Connector - P20 ......................................... 11-26 Miscellaneous Connector - P22.............................................. 11-28 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21 ......................... 11-30

11-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

List of Figures
Figure 11-1 Figure 11-2 Figure 11-3 Figure 11-4 Location of Main Board ................................................................................... 11-5 System Architecture ........................................................................................ 11-6 Main Board block diagram .............................................................................. 11-8 Typical Main Board layout (not detailed) ......................................................... 11-9

List of Tables
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics................................................................... 11-16 Table 11-2 Power Control System Signal Lines ............................................................... 11-17 Table 11-3 SPI Channel Signals ...................................................................................... 11-18 Table 11-4 Optical Security Sensor Assignment.............................................................. 11-19 Table 11-5 Mechanical Security Switch Assignment........................................................ 11-20 Table 11-6 Coin Handling Signals .................................................................................... 11-20 Table 11-7 Hopper Control Signals .................................................................................. 11-21 Table 11-8 Communications Configuration Board connector - P23................................. 11-24 Table 11-9 Optically Isolated Connector - P20................................................................. 11-26 Table 11-10 Miscellaneous Connector - P22 ................................................................... 11-28 Table 11-11 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21............................................... 11-30

Revision 01

11-3

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.1Introduction
The Main Board provides central control of the gaming machine. The board is fitted with an ARM RISC microprocessor which interfaces with other equipment in the machine via the Interface Board. The machine may be fitted with one of two Main Boards: Part No. 2501-410389 or 2501-410448. The main features of the Main Board are as follows:

ARM RISC microprocessor operating at 12 MHz (combines CPU, memory management, I/O Interface, audio and video on a single chip) on-board power supply regulator audio amplifier for speaker game EPROMS security monitoring of machine door activities serial channels watchdog timer and reset surface mounted technology flexible design allows for future changes to the machine configuration.

11-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

11.2Physical Description
The Main Board contains an ARM RISC microprocessor that interfaces with a number of subsystems via the Interface Board. Figure 11-2 provides a block diagram illustrating the electronics system architecture. The system is available in various configurations to meet specific machine requirements. The Main Board, along with the other major PCBAs, is located within the security logic cage (see Figure 11-1). The logic cage is a lockable, steel box located underneath the monitor shelf. It provides security and protection for the PCBAs. The Main Board slides on guides within the cage and connects directly to the Interface Board via three 96-way DIN 41612 connectors. Connectors are provided on the Main Board for the Communications Configuration Board and an optional memory expansion PCBA.
Logic Cage

Main Board

I/O Driver Board

I0076

I/O Expansion Board or LAB Communications Board (if fitted)

Interface Board

Figure 11-1 Location of Main Board

11.2.1

Diagrams and Component Locations


For further information and for reference, the following additional information on the Main Board is provided in Volume II: Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams. Board Layout. A drawing of the Main Board showing the location of the components. I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

Figure 11-4 shows component locations on the Main Board.

Revision 01

11-5

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.3

Functional Description
The Main Board interfaces with the following devices (depending on machine features) via the Interface Board:

MkV Series II I/O Driver Board - Part No. 410415 Video Monitor / Touchscreen Mechanical Meter Board Power Supply Assembly Pushbuttons and Pushbutton Lamps Animation Lamps Network Interface Link Progressive System Player Marketing Module Security Devices Money Management Devices Printer Cooling Fan Mechanical Security Switches Optical Security Switches Key Switches Optional I/O Connector Debug Port
TOP BOX
DACOM PLAYER MARKETING LINK PROGRESSIVE LIGHT TOWER MECHANICAL METER PCB SECURITY SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENT POWER SUPPLY FLUORESCENT BALLASTS

DOOR

CABINET
VIDEO MONITOR

SPEAKERS PUSHBUTTONS LAMPS DOOR SECURITY COIN CHUTE ASSEMBLY

JACKPOT SWITCH OPERATOR SWITCH HANDLE SWITCH SOLENOID SECURITY SWITCHES 1 Main Door Mechanical 1 Main Door Optical 7 Auxilliary Mechanical 7 Auxilliary Optical

INTERFACE BOARD

POWER SUPPLY UNIT

MAIN BOARD
COMMUNICATIONS CONFIGURATION PCB

I/O DRIVER PCB

OPTIONAL PCB #1

SERIAL CHANNELS #1, #2, #3 Network I/F, Touch Screen, Serial Printer, Bill Acceptor, RS232, etc I0077

HOPPER

DEBUGGING PORT

Figure 11-2 System Architecture

11-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

11.3.1

Main Board Functions


The Main Board has the following capabilities and functions: Core processor and memory. - (ARM250 32 bits RISC ASIC operating at 12 MHz). - On Board EPROMs. - External Memory Board Interface. - DRAM (a minimum of 1 Mbyte or 2 Mbyte as a build option). Non-volatile storage. - EEPROMs (2). - SRAM for Electronic Meters (three devices). LAB via the Interface Board. Interrupt System. - Interrupt glue logic. - Timers and Operating System Tick logic. Coin Handling System. - Coin Chute. - Hopper Interface. Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI). - SPI bus driver and multiplexer circuitry. Internal Read/Write control registers. Security. - Security switches (up to 8 optical and 8 mechanical switches). Communications. - DES Encryption IC - Four serial channels (two DUARTs). One channel is configured for FIP and RS232; the other three are configurable for Bank Note Acceptor, Serial Printer, Touch Screen, RS232, TTL, DACOM5000, or other signal levels. - Mikohn Link Progressive pulse interface Power Control System. - Onboard DC-DC converter (+24 V to +5 V). - Power supply supervisor and reset circuitry. - Interface with the Solid State Relay (SSR). - Status monitoring. Reset System Diagnostics. - Circuitry for test, diagnostics and debugging (used in conjunction with the External Memory board). Real Time Clock (RTC). Mechanical Switch Inputs. - Five mechanical switch inputs for Cancel Credit/Reset, Audit, Handle, etc. Video System. Sound System.

Revision 01

11-7

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.4

Technical Description
This section begins with two diagrams: a block diagram (Figure 11-3) introducing the various functional subsystems of the Main Board and a layout diagram (Figure 11-4) indicating the location of components on the Main Board. These diagrams are followed by a description of the various components of the Main Board. This section describes the various components of the main board.

Volume Audio Control Watchdog Mikhon Link Progressive Memory Real Time Clock Power Supply Unit Mechanical Meters Mechanical Switches Security I/O Driver Board Hopper
I0121 Power Fail

Video

Reset

8 bit I/O

ARM 250 PROCESSOR 32 bit System Memory Interrupt

Debug Port

Battery Backup Circuit

External I/O Interface (Optional)

Timer FIP Display or RS232 (Channel 0) UARTS Parallel Port Serial Channel #1, #2, #3 Bank Note Acceptor Printer (Optional)

SPI Interface

Figure 11-3 Main Board block diagram

11-8

Revision 01

96-way Memory Expansion Connector External Battery P2 Link (EPROM size selection)

I0079

Revision 01
EPROM Decoder
Power Supply Regulator I/O Buffers

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Game EPROM sockets


Glue Logic

Game EPROM sockets

DRAM DRAM
ARM250 Microprocessor

DRAM Emulator

Encryption IC (410388 only)

UART Channel 2 and Channel 3

410388 only Back Up Battery

Figure 11-4 Typical Main Board layout (not detailed)


Audio Amplifier

Back Up Battery

Back Up Battery

UART Channel 0 and Channel 1

72 Pin SIMM Connector (P23)

Opto-isolators for Communications Board

SRAM (3 off)

External I/O Buffers

Main Board

11-9
96 Way Connector (P22) 96 Way Connector (P20)

96 Way Connector (P21)

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.4.1

ARM250 Microprocessor

CPU The ARM250 microprocessor communicates with on board peripherals via a high speed 32 bit memory bus, an 8 bit I/O bus, and a serial (SPI) interface (see Figure 11-3). The ARM250 contains the following 5 major blocks within a single chip:

the ARM250 CPU I/O controller (IOC) video controller (VIDC) memory controller (MEMC) I/O expansion block (IOEB).

The ARM250 is a complete computer system on a chip comprising a 32-bit RISC microprocessor, a memory controller with DRAM interface, a bit-mapped video controller and an I/O controller. It is suitable for wide range of cost-sensitive embedded control, portable and consumer game applications - particularly those which require a video display. The device is designed to drive up to 4 Mbytes of DRAM directly at 12 MHz, and at this speed it can sustain approximately 10 MIPS. I/O Data Bus The ARM250 is designed to be easily interfaced to standard 8 bit peripheral chips. The majority of the I/O is handled by the internal I/O controller, with some extra functionality provided by the I/O expansion block. All I/O addresses in the ARM250 are memory mapped. The peripheral address bus is simply the latched address lines. These are buffered to reduce loading and to avoid slowing down EPROM access. Diagnostic LEDs The ARM250 has 4 open collector I/O bits. These are connected to 4 easily visible diagnostic LEDs to indicate diagnostic software status. The configuration of the circuit ensures that when the CPU is in reset, or when the software does not run, all the LEDs will be turned on. Therefore, faulty LEDs will be easily detected and not interpreted as incorrect diagnostic code. Interrupt System The interrupt system of the ARM250 functions with two main interrupts, FIQ and IRQ. Several external inputs are multiplexed internally to generate either a FIQ or IRQ interrupt. FIQ is defined as the "fast interrupt" and is used for real time processing. IRQ is defined as the "slow interrupt" and is used for slower interrupts. Specific registers are provided to enable the programmer to read the source of the interrupt without reading all the devices. FIQ is of higher priority than IRQ and can interrupt an IRQ service routine. IRQ cannot interrupt FIQ. The priority of different interrupts is determined in software after reading the status registers.

11-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

I/O Expansion Port Interrupts. The I/O expansion port has 4 interrupts: IL0, IF, FL, and FH0 (schematic IO_IN). Pull-up/down resistors pull unused interrupts to their inactive state. EMC filtering is provided by 1 k resistors and 100 pF capacitors to prevent spurious interrupts. ARM250 Timers The ARM250 has 4 built-in timers. These run off a 2 MHz clock and can time intervals from 500 ns to 32.768 ms. Four primary clocks exist within the board: 72 MHz, 48 MHz, 25.175 MHz, and 32.768 kHz. All other clocks are derived from these. Primary Clock. The ARM250 uses a primary clock of 72 MHz which is internally divided to provide 36 MHz for the memory controller, 36 MHz or 24 MHz for the video, 12 MHz for the CPU, 8 MHz and 2 MHz for the I/O controller. The 72 MHz clock has a tight duty cycle specification of 45/55%. System Clock. The CPU core (ARM2aS) and memory controller (MEMC) of the ARM250 have an optional clock input to allow higher speed operation. A 48 MHz clock on the SYSCLK input of the ARM250 is divided by 3 giving 16 MHz CPU and memory operation. Video Clock. The video clock may be either 36 MHz, 24 MHz or an optional external crystal input. The external crystal is 25.175 MHz for VGA. The clock selected for the video clock is output on the VIDCLK pin and input on the CLKVID pin, which are normally connected together. Time Clock. The real time clock chip uses a 32.768 kHz crystal to keep time.

The 8 MHz IOCLK output from the ARM250 is divided by 2 to 4 MHz for the DES encryption chip, by 512 to 15625 Hz for the SPI, and by 4096 to 1953.125 Hz for the operating system timer interrupt. The 12 MHz ARM250 keyboard clock output CLKKB, and the 2 MHz CLK2 IOC are not used.

11.4.2

Sound
The ARM250 has a built in stereo audio interface, requiring only filtering and amplification to drive a speaker. Sound data is accessed directly from DRAM and output to the audio D/A converters. The board implements a single channel of sound, because stereo is not required. The Main Board provides monophonic audio with the following characteristics:

Bandwidth : 200 Hz to 5.5 kHz 10%. Power output: 4 W RMS. Frequency response shape: fourth order pole at 5.5 kHz 10%. The volume is controllable via software with up to 16 steps.

The power amplifier features are:


Overload protected Short circuit protected Connected to the +24 V DC power supply.

Revision 01

11-11

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

A separate ground for the audio system has to be provided. It is connected to the digital ground (+5 V ground) and the power ground (+ 24 V ground) at one point only. Volume Control The volume is controlled by software according to the setting made in the appropriate audit screen. The circuit uses a 4 bit control to give 16 levels. The lowest level turns the sound off. The 74HC4066 switch is powered from +5 V DC, and requires that the inputs are below +5 V DC at all times. The output of the previous filter stage is decoupled with a 0.1 F capacitor and biased around 2.5 V DC. Audio Power Amplifier The TDA2006 audio power amplifier has overload/short circuit protection and is powered from +24 V DC. The speaker output is filtered using a surface mount ferrite bead and a 100 pF ceramic capacitor.

11.4.3

Video
The ARM250 has a built in video controller which directly drives a monitor. The video system conforms to the IBM VGA standard (mode 2) and gives a resolution of 640 x 400 pixels with 8 bits per pixel. Each video output signal from the ARM250 is a current sink with respect to the filtered video 5 V DC supply. The RGB signals (Red, Green and Blue) generate a voltage across a sense resistor and a common super diode, formed by a PNP transistor. The voltage across the sense circuit is converted to an output current per colour by a PNP transistor emitter follower. The RGB monitor output components are protected from transients by a three diode circuit for each colour signal. A 220 load resistor limits the maximum unterminated voltage at each transistor collector; this ensures the transistor does not saturate and disturb the sense resistor signal. In normal use the RGB outputs generate an analogue 0.7 V peak signal into an external 75 load. The sync signals have TTL levels.

11.4.4

Reset
The Main Board has 2 reset signals, RESETL and RESET. When reset is asserted it has a nominal period of 200 ms (guaranteed 140-280 ms). RESETL is the MAX705 reset output, valid for all supply voltages from 0-5 V DC. It is used in the battery backed circuits to prevent glitches during power up/down, while RESET is used every where else. RESET is the normal active low reset, generated by buffering RESETL. It is not valid between 0-2 V DC, as it is driven from HCMOS logic, which does not operate under 2.0 V DC.

11-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

Watchdog Timer The MAX705 incorporates a watchdog timer to reset the Main Board if the CPU does not strobe the watchdog input periodically within the timeout interval with an I/O access to RDCS1. The watchdog timeout period is nominally 1.6 seconds, and is guaranteed to be in the range of 1.0 to 2.25 seconds. The manual reset input (from the BTEST GAL) is asserted if the watchdog output trips (WDO) or if the external reset input is asserted. The MAX705 voltage comparator also checks the battery voltage. All devices that can be reset are reset to give the board a well defined power up state. Direct write registers are reset to 0x00. The ARM250 has 2 reset pins, RST and POR, and is reset through POR. RST is a bidirectional pin driven from POR. When POR is asserted the CPU is reset and RST is also asserted. RST is connected to the optional memory expansion board, which is reset by the Main Board reset, but can also reset the CPU by asserting RST. Peripheral I/O devices are reset I/O Expansion interface is reset Battery test GAL outputs are disabled.

11.4.5

Debug (Keyboard) Port


The ARM250 has a built-in serial communications port, the KART (Keyboard Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter). The KART is used only for debugging. The data format is fixed at 8 data bits, 1 start bit, 2 stop bits and no parity. Unlike a normal UART, the KART has no data buffering.

11.4.6

Debugging

DEMON The ARM source level software debugger DEMON requires three modifications to the Main Board to run. 1. 2. 3. The watchdog must be disabled The DRAM emulator must be disabled, as DEMON modifies the interrupt vectors in the first page of memory. The interrupt from UART U71 channel 0 must be inverted and connected to the CPU interrupt IL2. IL2 can generate either a IRQ or FIQ, but for DEMON generates a FIQ.

The Main Board is fitted with switches to enable and disable the watchdog and DRAM emulator, as although DEMON requires these features, normal game software does not. The memory expansion port contains a number of extra signals intended for debugging purposes.

Revision 01

11-13

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The CPU TEST signal implements the ARM250 tristate test mode when it is asserted. The CPU reset signal can act as both a reset from the CPU and a reset to the CPU.

The 72 MHz CPU clock oscillator supports the tristate enable/disable. All nodes are accessible on the solder side of the board for ATE testing. The ARM250 keyboard serial channel with signals KIN and KOUT is used for a debug interface.

11.4.7

External I/O Expansion


Two expansion interfaces are provided: I/O expansion through the interface board allows two general purpose 8-bit I/O boards, and one security subsystem board to be added, using 96-way DIN41612 connectors. The 32 bit memory expansion interface on the Main Board has a I/O port; however, this interface is primarily designed to add extra EPROM to the system.

I/O Boards Twelve address lines are provided, to access 4 kbytes of I/O space on the I/O boards. The 8 bit I/O data bus is buffered onto the I/O boards. I/O is accessed using chip select DACK. Peripheral PCBs take +5 V DC power from the Main Board. They may also derive +5 V DC from the +24 V DC supply, independent of the Main Board; however, care must be taken to avoid damage to both boards if the power supply on either board fails. Memory Expansion Board The memory expansion interface has an I/O port. The I/O select line AEN provides for 8-bit I/O expansion, which can be used to implement bank selection page register, or any other interface.

11.4.8

Mikohn Link Progressive Interface (where fitted)


The Main Board provides an optically coupled, open-collector pulse interface to a Mikohn Link Progressive system. The output is the standard Mikohn interface:

Switches 20 mA at 24 V. Optically isolated. Reverse protection diode.

11-14

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

11.4.9

Memory
The Main Board has six types of memory: DRAM provides memory for graphics, sound and other software requirements. DRAM Emulator. EPROM contains the game software. SRAM provides memory for metering. EEPROM contains high reliability configuration data. The Real Time Clock also contains a number of bytes of SRAM.

DRAM The Main Board has 2 Mbyte of dynamic RAM as standard. The ARM250 can address a maximum of 4 Mbytes of DRAM, using its built in DRAM controller. The ARM250 directly drives the multiplexed address lines (RA[9:0]), row and column (RAS, CAS[3:0]) strobes, output (OE[1:0]), and write enable (WE[1:0]) signals. The Main Board must have at least 1 Mbyte of dynamic RAM fitted, with the other 1 Mbyte being optional. Using 4 Mbit DRAMs the maximum possible (in 4 devices) is 2 Mbytes. The first bank of DRAMs is dual pitched to allow the use of 16 Mbit DRAMs allowing 4 Mbytes to be fitted in only 2 chips. As this is the maximum addressable, the second bank would not be fitted. DRAM Emulator The DRAM emulator logic detects an access to the interrupt vector table and substitutes either ROM or a fixed branch instruction (to EPROM) in place of the DRAM. EPROM The data bus for EPROMs is 32 bit wide. The Main Board contains sockets for 8 EPROMs, which can be configured to 1, 2, or 4 Mbit chips and each is 16 bit wide. This allows a maximum of 4 Mbytes of EPROMs, which is also the ARM250 addressing limit. To expand the memory beyond 4 Mbytes, the on-board EPROMs can be replaced by an external memory PCB which sits onto the main board Meters SRAM The Main Board provides 32 kbytes of Static Random Access Memory (SRAM) with battery back-up for the electronic meters. The SRAM contains machine metering information, such as money in/out, game history, etc. It is critical that this data is preserved reliably, and various jurisdictions require multiple backups of the data. Three standard low power SRAMs are fitted to the board. The data is usually replicated three times, so that each chip contains identical data. Each memory is checked against the other to verify that the stored data is correct. Each chip is mapped to the same address, and the chip selected depends on the bank select register. Access is mutually exclusive, increasing security with only one chip visible in the CPU address space at a time. If the CPU crashes and

Revision 01

11-15

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

overwrites memory only one of the three devices can be corrupted. On reset, the bank select register selects bank 0, which does not exist. The SRAMs are at banks 1,2,3. EEPROMS The Main Board has three serial EEPROMs. The minimum requirements are 128 bytes per EEPROM. The type selected is to be compatible with types providing 256 byte and 512 byte depth.
Table 11-1 Serial EEPROMs Characteristics

No.
1 2 3

Socketed
No Yes Yes

Write protected
Yes No No

Comment
Surface mount package For game options, DIP package For network address, DIP package

Memory Expansion Port The memory expansion port is primarily designed to add extra EPROM to the Main Board. The memory expansion PCB allows for up to 4 Mbytes of EPROM to be directly addressed together with signals to accommodate paged memory, external DRAM emulation and debug facilities. When the signal REPLACE is asserted from the expansion board it disables the on board EPROM, via address decode GAL U22. The external memory PCB interfaces with the Main Board via a 96-way DIN41612 connector.

11.4.10

Real Time Clock

The Main Board uses a Dallas DS1202 Real Time Clock (RTC). It uses a standard Dallas 3 wire interface, which is shared with the Dallas temperature measuring chip. The real-time clock, meter RAM #0, and the battery-backed security circuit on the I/O Driver Board are powered from the same battery.

11.4.11

Battery Backup Circuit

The Main Board has one lithium battery for the meter SRAM, Real Time Clock and the security circuit on the I/O Driver Board (refer to the chapter I/O Driver Board for details). WARNING
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced. Replace only with the same or equivalent type

CAUTION
Battery may explode if mistreated. Do not recharge, disassemble or dispose of in fire.

11-16

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

A resistor and diode combination in series prevents reverse charging of the battery. A lithium battery can potentially explode if reverse charged. The Main Board includes circuitry under CPU control to test the battery. The test places a resistor load on the battery and checks the voltage after a short delay (about 40 ms). The load is enabled from a monostable so that a fault in the software will not discharge the battery. The battery end life is at 2.0 V DC, below which the memory and logic are no longer guaranteed to work. The test will indicate a battery fail at 2.5 V DC. Replacing the Battery When the battery is changed, power will be maintained for a limited time by the decoupling capacitors. A connector is provided to allow for external battery backup during battery replacement.

11.4.12

Power Control Interface

Signal inputs and outputs The Main Board has several signal lines to interface with the power control system as shown in the following table:
Table 11-2 Power Control System Signal Lines

Signal
/SSR1 /PFAIL /EPSU2OVR GND

Type
Output Input Input Power

Comment
Control signal for the solid state relay to switch to low power mode, open collector active LOW Power Fail signal, open collector active LOW Output power 24 V correct, from power supply assembly + 24 Volt ground from the PMS

Power Lines and Grounding Scheme The Main Board receives +24 V DC from the power control assembly, via the Interface Board. The +24 V is supplied to the:

I/O Driver Board Audio power amplifier. Coin handling modules. Bank Note Acceptor Printer (if fitted) Mechanical meters Handle (if fitted)

The Main Board uses a Switched Mode Power Supply (SMPS) to generate 5 V DC and an isolated +/-12 V DC from the 24 V. The 5 V DC is used to supply the logic circuits, as well as the I/O expansion boards and the optional security subsystem board. The +/-12 V DC is supplied to the generic serial channels.

Revision 01

11-17

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The 24 V DC input and the 5 V DC output are EMC filtered using ferrite beads and ceramic capacitors. The Main Board also receives 12 V DC from the I/O Driver Board. This supply is passed through a linear regulator on the Main Board to generate the isolated 5 V DC supply required by the hopper. The power supply has overcurrent protection for current > 6.5 A for +5.1 V. The power supply is 'folded back' when overloaded. Power is resumed once the overload is removed. All outputs are protected from short circuit. The power is resumed after removal of the short circuit. The power supply also shuts down if the junction temperature of the regulator reaches 150C.

11.4.13

SPI Bus Driver and Multiplexer Circuitry

The Main Board implements a Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) bus for communicating with the I/O Driver Board and other external peripheral devices. The SPI bus is multiplexed into eight separate channels. Only one channel is accessible at any given time.
Table 11-3 SPI Channel Signals

Name
SCLK SIOEx SPIRST

Type
OUTPUT OUTPUT OUTPUT

Description
SPI Clock SPI Channel x Strobe SPI Clear

Comment
Serial bit clock. Common for all the channels. Enable line for the channel It has to be one independent line per channel Reset line to the channel. Channel #7 has no reset. Mechanical meters are reset separate to all other channels Reset mechanical meters It has to be one independent line per channel Common line for all the channels

SPIRST2 SPIDINx SPIDOUT

OUTPUT INPUT OUTPUT

SPI Channel 2 Clear SPI Channel x Data Input SPI Data Output

SPI Channels Functional Description The board has seven SPI channels selected via three bits in an output register. Channel 0 is defined as the reset or null state. Data written to channel 0 will be read back in its bitwise inverted state as a diagnostic test. The seven channels are allocated as follows:

11-18

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7

Top box distribution board (Not Used) Mechanical meters board not used Door inputs, via I/O Driver PCB Door outputs, via I/O Driver PCB Main board slow I/O Main board security registers.

11.4.14

Printer and Mechanical Meters


Printer Mechanical meters

The Main Board can also drive the following peripheral equipment:

11.4.15

Mechanical Switches

The board senses the status of five mechanical switches (signals MSWITCH0 to MSWITCH4) in addition to the eight mechanical security switches. MSWITCH0 is the Audit reset switch, MSWITCH1 is the Jackpot reset switch, and MSWITCH2, MSWITCH3, and MSWITCH4 are spare. The spare switches may be used for an optional handle. The specifications for the inputs are:

The switch current is 5 mA from the 5 V logic supply. The circuit is filtered for EMC. Input filtering provides EMC protection. The signals are connected to the internal SPI channel via a low-pass filter and sensed with HCMOS logic levels.

11.4.16

Security

The system caters for two types of security inputs, optical and mechanical, with 8 of each. Optical Security The Main Board provides the necessary circuitry to interface eight IR LED emitter/photo-transistor detector pairs. The optical security sensors are monitored by the Main Board when the machine is powered. Sensor sharing between the Main Board and the optional security module is accomplished by the use of diodes.
Table 11-4 Optical Security Sensor Assignment

Switch No.
0 1 2 3

Function
Main Door Not used Not used Not used

Switch No.
4 5 6 7

Function
Not used Not used Not used Not used

Revision 01

11-19

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Mechanical Security The system provides the necessary circuitry to interface 8 mechanical security switches. The mechanical security sensors are monitored by the Main Board when the machine is powered. There is no monitoring of the mechanical security system when the power is turned off. The mechanical security sensor interface has the following specification:

Switch type: Single pole, changeover Secure state: normally closed Driving Source: +5 V DC
Table 11-5 Mechanical Security Switch Assignment

No.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Function
Logic Cage Top Box Mechanical Meters Cash Box Main Door Bank Note Stacker Not used Not used

Monitored by...
Main Board only when machine is powered. Not used. Main Board only when machine is powered. Not used. Main Board only when machine is powered. Main Board only when machine is powered. Spare. Spare.

11.4.17

Coin Handling System

Coin Chute Assembly The Main Board interfaces with the coin chute assembly via the I/O Driver Board. The Main Board receives the signals "NOD1A", "NOD1B", "NOD2A", "S7 ALARM", and "AUDIT" from the coin interface section of the I/O Driver Board. It sends the control signals "NEODLEDON", "NECOINBLK", and "NECOINDIV" to the I/O Driver Board, which converts these signals into the form required by the coin chuting. All inputs have EMC R/C filtering, with a cut-off frequency of 3.4 kHz. Coin Diverter Solenoid The coin diverter solenoid output circuit has the following specifications:

Switches 200 mA at 24 V Open collector NPN (low side drive) output Short circuit protected (up to +24 V) Diode protected against back EMF
Table 11-6 Coin Handling Signals

Signal Name
+24v +5v GND NOD1A NOD1B NOD2A

Function
Coin diverter solenoid power Power for solenoid photo optic sensor Ground Coin optic detector 1A, to Main Board Coin optic detector 2B, to Main Board Cash box optic detector, to Main Board

11-20

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

S7ALARM AUDIT /EODLEDON /ECOINBLK /ECOINDIV

Simulated valid coin output to Main Board Audit pulse out for DACOM3000 NOD LED enable from Main Board. Coin block solenoid output from Main Board Coin diverter signal from Main Board.

Refer to the chapters on the Coin Chute Assembly and the Driver Board for further details.

11.4.18

Hopper Interface

The Main Board can interface with a hopper via the Interface Board. The hopper is driven using a power driver. The hopper receives 24 V to power the motor and an isolated 5 V to run the logic. The isolated 5 V is derived from the 12 V supply using a linear regulator on the Main Board. This voltage is also supplied, via the Interface Board, to other peripheral boards requiring isolated 5 V. The following table details the hopper interface signals.
Table 11-7 Hopper Control Signals

Signal Name
/EHOPCOIN /EHOPON /EHOPHI /EHOPLO P24V /EHOPTEST /EHOPOVR /EHOPDIR HOP5V GNDA

Function
Coin output detector Hopper motor drive Hopper high probe Hopper low probe +24 V power for motor Hopper sensor test Overcurrent sensor output Hopper motor direction control +5 V from Main Board Power and signal ground.

I/O
I O I I O I O O

Note
From hopper photo-optic detector +24 V driver output Detects hopper full Not used with ADH output from Main Board Not used with ADH Not used with ADH Converted from +12 V

11.4.19

Serial Channels

The board has four serial channels, referred to as channels 0-3, which may be used to communicate with peripheral equipment and external network interfaces. The serial channels are implemented via two PC compatible DUART's. The serial debug channel is implemented on the ARM250 and is described elsewhere. Channel 0 has a non-isolated interface to a Fluorescent Interface Panel (FIP) and an RS232 interface. Channels 1-3 are fully isolated and are configurable via the Communications Configuration Board (CCB). The serial ports are implemented using two industry standard UARTs. Each of the three generic serial channels (channels 1 to 3) has 1 receive data, 1 transmit data, 3 input and 3 output handshake lines. The maximum baud rate supported is 9600 baud, except on channel 2 which uses fast optocouplers.

Revision 01

11-21

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Communications Configuration Board Serial channels 1 to 3 are configured through the Communications Configuration Board (CCB) plugged into the 72 pin SIMM socket on the Main Board. The CCB converts the opto-coupled UART I/O to any of the following signal levels:

RS232 Current loop (Open collector) Bank Note Acceptor interface Serial printer TTL compatible level DACOM 5000 External network interface Touchscreen Other

Refer to the chapter Communications Configuration Board (CCB) for a detailed description.

11.4.20

Bank Note Acceptor

The Main Board communicates with the Bank Note Acceptor via generic serial channel 1 which is connected via P18 on the Interface Board.

11.4.21

Interface Board

The Main Board is connected to the Interface Board directly through three 96-way male right-angle DIN41612 connectors as follows: Optically Isolated Connector All the I/O signals in this connector are optically coupled. It contains the UART serial communication channels, SPI channels, Mikohn interface, hopper interface, and control signals for the power supply. It also provides connection to the power supply for +24 V, +5 V, +12 V DC, and 12 V. Miscellaneous Connector This connector contains the coin chute interface, video and audio signals, power control system solid state relay, and the serial debug. It also connects to the +24 V and +5 V power supply. Security and I/O Expansion Connector The connector contains both optical and mechanical security signals, mechanical switch signals, and I/O expansion signals. It also provides connection to the +24 V power supply.

11-22

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

11.5

Removal and Replacement Procedures


WARNING
Turn the machine power OFF before removing PCBAs from the logic cage.

CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical contact with components. Do not place ESDs on metal surfaces. PCBs should be handled by their edges. Care must be taken to avoid flexing the PCB, as this may lead to physical damage.

Removal To remove the Main Board: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the main door and switch OFF the machine. Open the logic cage door. Standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be followed when handling PCBAs. Lever the PCBA out of the runners using the board extractors, and withdraw the board from the logic cage. The PCBA should be placed in an antistatic bag immediately. Note
A fault tag must be placed on any faulty boards.

Replacement Replacement is a reversal of the removal procedure. Both sides of the replacement PCBA should be inspected for any signs of physical damage.

Revision 01

11-23

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.6Description of Connectors
11.6.1 Communications Configuration Board

A 72-pin SIMM socket is used to connect to the CCB:


Table 11-8 Communications Configuration Board connector - P23

Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45

Pin Name
CFG2 GNDI CFG4 CFG1 SIN1 CFG3 SOUT1 CFG6 CTS1 CFG5 DSR1 CFG8 CFG7 CFG10 I1 CFG11 CFG9 CFG12 RTS1 CFG13 DTR1 CFG14 O1 P12VI CFG20 N12VI CFG19 GNDI CFG18 CFG17 CFG16 CFG15 SIN2 CFG22 SOUT2 CFG29 CTS2 CFG30 DSR2 CFG21 I2 CFG31 RTS2 CFG32 DTR2

Description
DTR0 output signal through opto emitter Ground RTS1 output signal through opto emitter DTR0 output signal through opto collector Input from channel 1 connector RTS1 output signal through opto collector Output to channel 1 connector DTR1 output signal through opto emitter Input from channel 1 connector DTR1 output signal through opto collector Input from channel 1 connector SOUT1 output signal through opto emitter SOUT1 output signal through opto collector CTS1 input signal through opto cathode Input from channel 1 connector DSR1 input signal through opto anode CTS1 input signal through opto anode DSR1 input signal through opto cathode Output to channel 1 connector SIN1 input signal through opto anode Output to channel 1 connector SIN1 input signal through opto cathode Output to channel 1 connector +12v power RTS2 output signal through opto emitter -12v power RTS2 output signal through opto collector Ground SOUT2 output signal through opto emitter SOUT2 output signal through opto collector SOUT2 output signal through opto base Opto Vcc Input from channel 2 connector DTR2 output signal through opto emitter Output to channel 2 connector SIN2 input signal through opto anode Input from channel 2 connector SIN2 input signal through opto cathode Input from channel 2 connector DTR2 output signal through opto collector Input from channel 2 connector CTS2 input signal through opto anode Output to channel 2 connector CTS2 input signal through opto cathode Output to channel 2 connector

11-24

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

Pin
46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72

Pin Name
CFG33 O2 P12VI CFG34 GNDI CFG24 N12VI SIN3 CFG23 SOUT3 CFG26 CFG25 CFG28 CTS3 CFG27 CFG35 CFG36 DSR3 CFG37 I3 CFG38 RTS3 CFG39 DTR3 CFG40 O3 GNDI

Description
DSR2 input signal through opto anode Output to channel 2 connector +12v power DSR2 input signal through opto cathode Ground RTS3 output signal through opto emitter -12v power Input from channel 3 connector RTS3 output signal through opto collector Output to channel 3 connector DTR3 output signal through opto emitter DTR3 output signal through opto collector SOUT3 output signal through opto emitter Input from channel 3 connector SOUT3 output signal through opto collector CTS3 input signal through opto anode CTS3 input signal through opto cathode Input from channel 3 connector DSR3 input signal through opto anode Input from channel 3 connector DSR3 input signal through opto cathode Output to channel 3 connector SIN3 input signal through opto anode Output to channel 3 connector SIN3 input signal through opto cathode Output to channel 3 connector Ground

Revision 01

11-25

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.6.2

Optically Isolated Connector - P20


This connector interfaces with P1 on the Interface Board.
Table 11-9 Optically Isolated Connector - P20

PIN
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10 A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13 A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15 A16 B16 C16 A17

Pin Name
SIN1 N12VI CTS1 GNDI SOUT1 I1 P12VI DSR1 O1 DTR1 RTS1 SIN2 N12VI CTS2 GNDI SOUT2 I2 P12VI DSR2 O2 DTR2 RTS2 SIN3 N12VI CTS3 GNDI SOUT3 I3 P12VI DSR3 O3 DTR3 RTS3

Comment
Receive data, serial channel 1 -12V from main board, isolated --Handshake Input 0, serial channel 1 Ground of 12 voltage, isolated Transmit Data, serial channel 1 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 1 +12V from main board, isolated Handshake Input 1, serial channel 1 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 1 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 1 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 1 Receive data, serial channel 2 -12V from main board, isolated --Handshake Input 0, serial channel 2 Ground of 12 voltage, isolated Transmit data, serial channel 2 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 2 +12V from main board, isolated Handshake Input 1, serial channel 2 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 2 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 2 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 2 Receive data, serial channel 3 -12V from main board, isolated --Handshake Input 0, serial channel 3 Ground of 12 voltage, isolated Transmit data, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 3 +12V from main board, isolated Handshake Input 1, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 3 ------------------------Data from meter board

/ESPIDIN2

11-26

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

PIN
B17 C17 A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32

Pin Name
GNDA /ESPIDIN1 /ESPIDIN5 GNDA /ESPIDIN4 ESPIRST GNDA /ESPIDOUT ESCLK GNDA ESPIRST2 /ESIOE2 GNDA /ESIOE1 /ESIOE5 GNDA /ESIOE4 /EHOPOVR GNDA /EHOPHI GNDA /EHOPCOIN /EHOPDIR GNDA /EHOPLO /EHOPTEST GNDA /EHOPON GNDA VCC EPSU2SND GNDA /EPSU2OVR /ESPARE01 GNDA /EHANDLE P24VA GNDA P24VA EMIKOHNP P12V P12V GNDA EMIKOHNN

Comment
Ground Data from top box Serial data input to main logic from serial input driver. Open collector output. Ground Serial data input to main logic from serial output driver. Open collector output. SPI reset signal Ground Data output to meter board Serial clock Ground Reset signal to meter board Strobe signal to meter board Ground Serial output enable to top box Serial output enable #5 which selects SPI output driver. Ground Serial output enable #4 which selects SPI input driver. Overcurrent sensor output, hopper Ground --Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper Ground Coin output detector, hopper Hopper motor direction, hopper Ground Detects hopper low, hopper Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper Ground Hopper motor drive, hopper --Ground +5V --Ground --Spare output signal Ground --+24V Ground +24V Mikohn signal +12V from driver board +12V from driver board --Ground Mikohn signal

Revision 01

11-27

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.6.3

Miscellaneous Connector - P22


This connector interfaces with P2 on the Interface Board.
Table 11-10 Miscellaneous Connector - P22

PIN
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10 A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13 A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15 A16 B16 C16 A17

Pin Name
/ES2OVERDE GNDD /EODLEDON S7ALARM /ECOINDIV /ECOINBLK NOD1B GNDD NOD1A CVP0 NOD2B NOD2A CVP2 GNDD CVP1 /SSR1 CVP4 CVP3 RS232TX GNDD FIPOUT RS232RX RS232RTS RS232CTS RED REDGND BLUE GREENGND GREEN BLUEGND VSYNC SYNCGND SPEAKER HSYNC SPEAKER2 SPKRGND P24VSND GNDD VCC GNDD VCC GNDD VCC GNDD VCC GNDD VCC

Comment
Door detector on Mk4 (never used) Ground NOD1 LED enable S7 Alarm or Coin Validator coin valid Coin Divert Drive (NPN trans. to GND) Coin Validator enable (switches power through NOD) / S7 Inhibit NOD1 Coin output B / S7 Coin output 5 Ground NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out. S7 Coin output NOD2 Coin output B NOD2 Coin output A S7 Coin output Ground S7 Coin output solid state relay for ballast and monitor On/Off (LED cathode) S7 Coin output S7 Coin output serial 0, nonisolated transmitter Ground Serial Transmit Data out serial 0, nonisolated receiver nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0 nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0 --Red, video red colour signal ground Blue, video blue colour signal ground Green, video green colour signal ground Vsync, video synchro signal ground Audio output --Hsync, video Stereo speaker output speaker signal ground +24V, single track on PCB Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V

11-28

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

PIN
B17 C17 A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32

Pin Name
GNDD VCC KOUT KIN GNDD

Comment
Ground +5V from main board, converted from 24V --Serial data OUTPUT from ARM250 Serial data INPUT from ARM250 --Ground ----------Ground ----------Ground ----------Ground --External battery backup --Power fail signal, active low Emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000 Ground ----------Ground ----------Ground ---------

GNDD

GNDD

GNDD VBATE /PFAIL /MIKOHN GNDD

GNDD

GNDD

Revision 01

11-29

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

11.6.4

Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21


This connector interfaces with P3 on the Interface Board.
Table 11-11 Security and I/O Expansion Connector - P21

PIN
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10 A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13 A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15 A16 B16 C16 A17

Pin Name
MSWITCH1 GNDD MSWITCH0 MSWITCH4 MSWITCH3 MSWITCH2 GNDD MSS0 OPRIS0 EMCS0 EMCS1 GNDD MSSO0 MSSO1 MSS1 OPRIS1 OPRIS2 GNDD EMCS2 EMCS3 MSSO2 MSS2 MSS3 GNDD OPRIS3 OPRIS4 EMCS4 MSSO3 EMCS5 GNDD MSS4 EMCS6 MSS5 OPRIS5 MSS6 GNDD OPRIS6 MSS7 OPRIS7 EMCS7 GNDD VBAT0

Comment
mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET Ground mech. switch, AUDIT RESET mech. switch, spare mech. switch, spare mech. switch, spare --Ground --Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NC Door security detector output, no driver/buffer exists. door optical emitter Emitter 1 Drive signal, security 1 Ground Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NO Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NO Mechanical Security Switch 1 contact - NC Receiver 1 Sense signal, security 1 Receiver 2 Sense signal, security 2 Ground Emitter 2 Drive signal, security 2 Emitter 3 Drive signal, security 3 Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NO Mechanical Security Switch 2 contact - NC Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NC Ground Receiver 3 Sense signal, security 3 Receiver 4 Sense signal, security 4 Emitter 4 Drive signal, security 4 Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NO Emitter 5 Drive signal, security 5 Ground Mechanical Security Switch 4 contact - NC Emitter 6 Drive signal, security 6 Mechanical Security Switch 5 contact - NC Receiver 5 Sense signal, security 5 Mechanical Security Switch 6 contact - NC Ground Receiver 6 Sense signal, security 6 Mechanical Security Switch 7 contact - NC Receiver 7 Sense signal, security 7 Emitter 7 Drive signal, security 7 --Ground --Backup battery 0 ----CPU, read not write signal

RNW

11-30

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Main Board

PIN
B17 C17 A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32

Pin Name
GNDD /EIF EFHO /DACK /EFL GNDD /EIL0 /ERESET /EIOW /EIOR EA13 GNDD ECLK8M EA10 EA11 EA12 EA8 GNDD EA9 EA5 EA6 EA7 EA3 GNDD EA4

Comment
Ground --CPU, IF interrupt CPU, FH0 interrupt CPU, data acknowledge CPU, FL interrupt Ground CPU, IL0 interrupt CPU, external reset output CPU, IO write signal CPU, IO read signal CPU, address bus Ground CPU, clock signal CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus Ground CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus Ground CPU, address bus ----CPU, address bus --Ground --CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus Ground CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus Ground +24V Ground +24V Ground +24V

EA2 GNDD ED5 ED6 ED7 ED3 GNDD ED4 ED0 ED1 ED2 GNDD P24VD GNDD P24VD GNDD P24VD

Revision 01

11-31

Main Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

11-32

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

________Chapter 12________
Interface Board Part No. 410315 Issue B
12.1 12.1.1 12.2 12.3 12.3.1 12.3.2 12.3.3 12.3.4 12.3.5 12.3.6 12.3.7 12.3.8 12.3.9 12.3.10 12.3.11 12.3.12 12.3.13 12.3.14 12.3.15 12.3.16 12.3.17 12.3.18 12.3.19 12.3.20 Physical Description ............................................................ 12-3 Diagrams and Component Locations ..................................... 12-3 Technical Description .......................................................... 12-5 Description of Connectors .................................................. 12-7 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3 .............................. 12-7 Driver Board, P4..................................................................... 12-7 LAB Comms, P5..................................................................... 12-7 Mechanical Meters, P6........................................................... 12-7 Security - P8, P22, and P24 ................................................... 12-7 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11.................................... 12-9 Coin Handling, P12 .............................................................. 12-10 Bill Acceptor, Backlight and Security, P13 ........................... 12-11 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18. ......................... 12-11 DACOM 5000, P21 .............................................................. 12-13 Mikohn, P16 ......................................................................... 12-13 SPI Channel 1, P19.............................................................. 12-14 DACOM 3000, P20 .............................................................. 12-14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23................................................ 12-15 Hopper, P25 ......................................................................... 12-15 Video, P26............................................................................ 12-15 Mechanical Switches - P27 .................................................. 12-16 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28 ...................... 12-16 Power Supply, P29............................................................... 12-17 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30.................................................. 12-17

Revision 01

12-1

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

12.4

Removal and Replacement Procedures ........................... 12-18

List of Figures
Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location ........................................................12-4

List of Tables
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections.......................................................................12-6

12-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

12.1 Physical Description


The Interface Board is a single printed circuit board assembly (PCBA) mounted vertically at the base of the cabinet, partly enclosed within the logic cage. The Interface Board is used to electrically connect the Main Board, the I/O Driver Board, and all peripheral PCBAs and subsystems. The Main Board and I/O Driver Board connect directly to the Interface Board within the logic cage. The Communication Configuration Board and the optional I/O Expansion Board/LAB Communications Board connect directly to the Main Board, within the logic cage. All other PCBAs and peripherals are connected to the Interface Board via ribbon cables or wire looms. The component layout of the Interface Board is shown in Figure 12-1.

12.1.1 Diagrams and Component Locations


For further information and for reference, the following additional information on the Interface Board is provided in Volume II:

Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams. I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

Revision 01

12-3

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I0093

Figure 12-1 Interface Board Component Location

12-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

12.2 Technical Description


The Interface Board provides electrical connection for the following boards and connectors: MkV Main Board MkV Series II I/O Driver Board MkV Series II Mechanical Meter Board MkV Series II Power Supply Assembly I/O Expansion Board / LAB Comms Board Pushbuttons and Pushbutton Lamps Coin Handling Speakers Video Monitor / Touchscreen Networks Security Switches Jackpot / Audit Key Switches Bill Acceptor Mikohn Progressives Hopper Printer Cooling Fan Spare Power Connector Spare Switch Connector SPI Channel 1

Revision 01

12-5

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The following table lists the function and type of each connector on the Interface Board.
Table 12-1 Interface Board Connections

Designator
P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P8 P10 P11 P12 P13 P14 P15 P16 P17 P18 P19 P20 P21 P22 P23 P24 P25 P26 P27 P28 P29 P30

Function
MkV Main Board MkV Main Board MkV Main Board MkV Series II Driver Board Expansion I/O - LAB board Mechanical meter Logic door security Door buttons and lamps 1 Door buttons and lamps 2 Coin handling, speaker, and door opto Bill acceptor LEDs, backlight and security Serial channel no. 0 Generic serial channel no. 2 Mikohn Generic serial channel no. 3 Serial channel no. 1 (bill acceptor) SPI channel 1 DACOM 3000 DACOM 5000 Security no. 3-5 Spare 24 V DC Security no. 6 & 7 Hopper Video, touchscreen Mechanical switch - handle Audit/jackpot switch and door opto emitter MkV Series II power supply Fan

Type of Connector
DIN 96 pin vertical female DIN 96 pin vertical female DIN 96 pin vertical female DIN 96 pin vertical female DIN 96 pin vertical female 26 way ribbon cable 4 way Minifit 24 way Minifit 20 way Minifit 24 way Minifit 14 way Minifit 12 way Minifit 16 way Minifit 4 way Minifit 16 way Minifit 20 way Minifit 26 way ribbon cable 20 way ribbon cable 10 way ribbon cable 24 way Minifit 4 way Minifit 14 way Minifit 14 way Minifit 16 way Minifit 12 way Minifit 14 way Minifit 16 way Minifit 4 way Minifit

12-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

12.3 Description of Connectors


The following sections describe the connectors on the interface board. Some of the connectors may not be applicable to all customers.

12.3.1 Main Board Connectors - P1, P2, and P3


P1, P2 and P3 interface with the 96-pin DIN connectors P20, P22 and P21 respectively, on the Main Board. Refer to the Main Board chapter for a listing of pin assignments.

12.3.2 Driver Board, P4


The Driver Board connects directly to the Interface Board via a DIN 96 pin vertical connector. Refer to the I/O Driver Boad chapter for a listing of the pin assignments.

12.3.3 LAB Comms, P5


The LAB Communications Board connects to the Interface Board via a DIN 96 pin vertical connector. Refer to the LAB Communications Board chapter for a listing of the pin assignments.

12.3.4 Mechanical Meters, P6


This connector is located within the logic cage and facilitates the connection of the electromechanical meters and also security switch 2. Refer to the Electromechanical Meters chapter for a listing of the pin assignments.

12.3.5 Security - P8, P22, and P24


The security system monitors the optical and mechanical switch inputs during normal operation. The security signals are typically distributed as follows:
Security
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Mechanical
Logic Cage Top Box Mechanical Meters Cash Box Main Door Bill Acceptor Cover -------

Optical
Main Door ----------------------

Note: The actual distribution and use of security switches will depend on the individual machine configuration.

Revision 01

12-7

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Logic door security, P8 The function of the Logic Door security switch system is to detect access to the logic system whilst power is off.
Pin
1 2 3 4

Pin Name
MSS0 GND MSSO0

Comments
Logic Door Security Switch 0 contact - NC Ground Logic Door Security Switch 0 contact - NO ----

Security No.3 to No.5, P22


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Pin Name
OPRIS5 GND MSS4 EMCS4 GND MSSO3 OPRIS3 GND

Comments
---Receiver 5 Sense signal, security 5 Ground Mechanical Security Switch 4 contact - NC ---Emitter 4 Drive signal, security 4 Ground (Keyed) Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NO Receiver 3 Sense signal, security 3 Ground ------(Keyed) Emitter 5 Drive signal, security 5 Ground Receiver 4 Sense signal, security 4 Ground Mechanical Security Switch 5 contact - NC Ground Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NC Emitter 3 Drive signal, security 3 Ground ----

EMCS5 GND OPRIS4 GND MSS5 GND MSS3 EMCS3 GND

12-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

Security 6 and 7, P24


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Pin Name
MSS6 GND EMCS6 OPRIS6 GND MSS7 GND EMCS7 OPRIS7 GND

Comments
(Keyed) Mechanical Security Switch 6 contact - NC Ground Emitter 6 Drive signal, security 6 Receiver 6 Sense signal, security 6 Ground ---Mechanical Security Switch 7 contact - NC (Keyed) Ground Emitter 7 Drive signal, security 7 Receiver 7 Sense signal, security 7 Ground

12.3.6 Door Signals Interface - P10 and P11


Pushbuttons and lamps 1, P10
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Signal
P22V5 PBLMP1 PBLMP2 PBLMP3 PBLMP4 PBLMP5 PBLMP6 PBLMP7 PBLMP8 PBLMP9 PBLMP10 P22V5 PBIN1 PBIN2 PBIN3 PBIN4 PBIN5 PBIN6 PBIN7 PBIN8 PBIN9 PBIN10

Description
+22.5 V for lamps Pushbutton lamp output 1 Pushbutton lamp output 2 Pushbutton lamp output 3 Pushbutton lamp output 4 Pushbutton lamp output 5 Pushbutton lamp output 6 Pushbutton lamp output 7 Pushbutton lamp output 8 Pushbutton lamp output 9 (Keyed) Pushbutton lamp output 10 +22.5 V for lamps (Keyed) Pushbutton input 1 Pushbutton input 2 Pushbutton input 3 Pushbutton input 4 Pushbutton input 5 Pushbutton input 6 Pushbutton input 7 Pushbutton input 8 Pushbutton input 9 Pushbutton input 10

Revision 01

12-9

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Pushbuttons and lamps 2, P11


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Signal
P22V5 PBLMP10 PBLMP11 PBLMP12 PBLMP13 PBLMP14 PBLMP15 PBLMP16 P22V5 PBIN10 PBIN11 PBIN12 PBIN13 PBIN14 PBIN15 PBIN16

Description
+22.5V for lamps (Keyed) Pushbutton lamp output 10 Pushbutton lamp output 11 Pushbutton lamp output 12 Pushbutton lamp output 13 Pushbutton lamp output 14 Pushbutton lamp output 15 Pushbutton lamp output 16 +22.5V for lamps Pushbutton input 10 Pushbutton input 11 Pushbutton input 12 Pushbutton input 13 Pushbutton input 14 Pushbutton input 15 (Keyed) Pushbutton input 16

12.3.7 Coin Handling, P12


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

Signal
P24VA GNDA S7ALARM CDIVPOS CENABLE /CDIVERT P12V CVP0 CVP1 CVP2 SPEAKER SPEAKER2 VCC GND CCREDIT CSENSE CERROR ACCUMPRICE GND CVP3 CVP4 OPRIS0 SPKRGND1 SPKRGND2

Description
+24V Ground S7 error signal from S7 validator Coin diverter position from coin chute Coin validator enable signal Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute +12V from driver board S7 Coin output S7 Coin output S7 Coin output Audio output Stereo speaker output +5V for NODs Ground Coin credit pulse Coin sense output from coin validator Coin error signal from coin validator Accumulated coin output from S7 validator Ground S7 Coin output S7 Coin output Door opto detector Speaker ground 1 Speaker ground 2

12-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

12.3.8 Bill Acceptor, Backlight and Security, P13


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Signal
P22V5 DNOMLED5 DNOMLED6 DNOMLED7 BKLITE MSS5 P22V5 DNOMLED4 DNOMLED3 DNOMLED2 DNOMLED1 GND

Description
+22.5V for lamps (Keyed) Bill acceptor denomination LED 1 Bill acceptor denomination LED 2 Bill acceptor denomination LED 3 Bill acceptor denomination LED 4 Mechanical Security Switch 5 contact - NC +22.5V for lamps Bill acceptor back light Bill acceptor denomination LED 7 (Keyed) Bill acceptor denomination LED 6 Bill acceptor denomination LED 5 Ground

12.3.9 Serial Channels - P14, P15, P17, and P18.


Channel 0 has a non-isolated interface to a FIP (Fluorescent Indicator Panel) display and an RS232 interface. Channels 1-3 are fully isolated and are configurable via the Communications Configuration Board on the Main Board. Serial channel 0, P14
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Signal
P12V RS232TX RS232RX GND

Description
(Keyed) +12V DC supply from driver board serial 0, nonisolated transmitter serial 0, nonisolated receiver Ground (Keyed) nonisolated handshake Input 0, serial channel 0 nonisolated handshake Output 0, serial channel 0 +5V from main board, converted from 24V Serial Transmit Data out

RS232CTS RS232RTS VCC FIPOUT

Revision 01

12-11

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Generic serial channel 2, P15


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal
P24V SIN2 SOUT2 CTS2 DSR2 GND I2 P12VI N12VI GNDI RTS2 DTR2 O2

Description
+24V (Keyed) Receive data, serial channel 2 Transmit data, serial channel 2 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 2 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 2 (Keyed) Ground Handshake Input 2, serial channel 2 +12V isolated, from main board -12V isolated, from main board Ground 12V isolated Handshake Output 0, serial channel 2 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 2 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 2

Generic serial channel 3, P17


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal
P24V SIN3 SOUT3 CTS3 DSR3 I3 GND

Description
+24V Receive data, serial channel 3 Transmit data, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 3 (Keyed) Ground ---(Keyed) +12V isolated, from main board -12V isolated, from main board Ground 12V isolated Handshake Output 0, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 3

P12VI N12VI GNDI RTS3 DTR3 O3

12-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

Generic serial channel 1 (Bill Acceptor), P18


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Signal
P24V SIN1 SOUT1 CTS1 DSR1 I1 O1 GND GND

Description
+24V Receive data, serial channel 1 Transmit Data, serial channel 1 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 1 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 1 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 1 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 1 Ground Ground not used not used (Keyed) +12V isolated, from main board -12V isolated, from main board ground 12V isolated Handshake Output 0, serial channel 1 (Keyed) Handshake Output 1, serial channel 1 Mechanical Security Switch 5 contact - NC not used

P12VI N12VI GNDI RTS1 DTR1 MSS5

12.3.10 DACOM 5000, P21


DACOM 5000/BIPS is a current loop connection with a source voltage of 24 V, and it is connected via a 10-way ribbon cable IDC header. The DACOM interface is configured on serial channel 3 through the Communications Configuration Board.
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Signal
SIN3 SOUT3 CTS3 DSR3 I3 RTS3 DTR3 O3

Description
Receive data, serial channel 3 Transmit data, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 0, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 1, serial channel 3 Handshake Input 2, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 0, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 1, serial channel 3 Handshake Output 2, serial channel 3 Connected to pin 10 on interface board Connected to pin 9 on interface board

12.3.11 Mikohn, P16


P16 is used for the Mikohn link progressive interface.
Pin
1 2

Pin Name
EMIKOHNP EMIKOHNN (Keyed) collector of Opto emitter of Opto

Function

Revision 01

12-13

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

12.3.12 SPI Channel 1, P19


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26

Signal

Function
----------Isolated ground --Isolated ground ----Serial clock Isolated ground Data output to meter board Isolated ground Serial output enable to top box --Reset signal to top box Isolated ground Data from top box Isolated ground +24V Isolated ground +24V Isolated ground +24V +24V

GNDA GNDA

ESCLK GNDA /ESPIDOUT GNDA /ESIOE1 ESPIRST GNDA /ESPIDIN1 GNDA P24VA GNDA P24V GNDA P24VA P24VA

12.3.13 DACOM 3000, P20


The purpose of this connector is keep compatibility with previous gaming machines. It merges certain signals defining the state of the machine and can be connected to the DACOM 3000 Interface Board.
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20

Signal
MSS4 MSS3 NESPARE01 MSS5 /EHOPON /MIKOHN /PFAIL NOD1A /EHOPCOIN AUDIT GND GND GND MSWITCH0 VCC MSWITCH1 P24V VCC

Description
Mechanical Security Switch 4 contact - NC, door switch Mechanical Security Switch 3 contact - NC, door switch Spare output signal Mechanical Security Switch 5 contact - NC, door switch Hopper motor drive, hopper emitter of link progressive for DACOM3000 power fail signal of 24V NOD1 Coin out. A / S7 accumulator out., coin input Coin output detector, hopper Signal from driver board Ground ---Ground ---Ground mech. switch, AUDIT RESET +5V from main board, converted from 24V mech. switch, JACKPOT RESET +24V +5V from main board, converted from 24V

12-14

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

12.3.14 Spare Voltage 24 V DC, P23


Provides a spare 24 V DC output.
Pin
1 2 3 4

Signal
P24V P24V GND GND +24V +24V Ground Ground

Description

12.3.15 Hopper, P25


The hopper interface has the following pin assignment:
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 11 13 14

Signal
P24VA /EHOPCOIN /EHOPON /EHOPHI /EHOPLO GNDA HOP5V /EHOPDIR /EHOPOVR /EHOPTEST GNDA

Description
+24V Coin output detector, hopper Hopper motor drive, hopper (Keyed) Hopper high probe, Detects hopper full, hopper Detects hopper low, hopper Ground +5V from main board, converted from 12V (Keyed) Hopper motor direction, hopper Overcurrent sensor output, hopper Hopper Sensor Test output, hopper Ground

12.3.16 Video, P26


The video connector enables the connection of a VGA standard monitor.
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal
HSYNC BLUE GREEN RED GNDE RS232RX RS232TX SYNCGND VSYNC BLUEGND GREENGND REDGND GND

Description
Hsync, video Blue, video Green, video Red, video Chassis ground Serial 0, nonisolated receiver Serial 0, nonisolated transmitter GND, video (Keyed) Vsync, video (Keyed) Blue return, video Green return, video Red return, video Ground

Revision 01

12-15

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

12.3.17 Mechanical Switches - P27


Five mechanical switches are available in addition to the eight mechanical security switches. P27 provides for three spare switches that may be used for an optional handle.
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Pin Name
P24V /EHANDLE +24V Handle (Keyed) ---Mech. switch, spare Ground (Keyed) Mech. switch, spare Ground Mech. switch, spare Ground

Function

MSWITCH4 GND

MSWITCH3 GND MSWITCH2 GND

12.3.18 Audit / Jackpot switch and door security, P28


P28 provides for the Jackpot reset switch and the Audit switch, as well as the main door optical emitter, the main door mechanical security switch, and a spare 24 V output.
Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14

Pin Name
P24V MSS4 GND EMCS0 GND P24V GND GND MSWITCH1 GND MSWITCH0 GND +24V (Keyed) Door security (Keyed) Ground door optical emitter Ground +24V Ground Ground Audit reset Ground Jackpot reset Ground

Function

12-16

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Interface Board

12.3.19 Power Supply, P29


Pin
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16

Signal
/SSR1 /EPSU2OVR P24VS P24VS P24VS P24VS P24VS /PFAIL GNDS GNDS GNDS GNDS GNDS

Description
Low power mode (Keyed) Output 24V correct +24V +24V +24V +24V +24V Future expansion Missing mains detection Ground Ground Ground Ground (Keyed) Ground

12.3.20 Optional Fan DC 12 V, P30


This connector is used to power an optional fan that may be mounted to the logic cage. The purpose of this fan is to relieve possible heat dissipation problems within the logic cage.
Pin
1 2 3 4 P12V GNDA

Signal

Function
+12V DC supply from Driver Board (Keyed) Ground

Revision 01

12-17

Interface Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

12.4 Removal and Replacement Procedures


CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical contact with components. PCBAs should be handled by their edges. ESDs should not be placed on metal surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take care to avoid flexing the PCBA, as this may lead to permanent damage.

Removal The procedures for removing and replacing the Interface Board are detailed in the chapter Cabinet, under the section describing how to remove and disassemble the logic cage. Note
A fault tag must be placed on any faulty equipment.

Run a complete machine test after replacing the Interface Board.

12-18

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I/O Driver Board

______Chapter 13______
I/O Driver Board 410415
13.1 13.1.1 13.2 13.2.1 13.2.2 13.2.3 13.3 13.4 Physical Description .............................................................. 13-3 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations............................ 13-3 Functional Description .......................................................... 13-3 Power Supply ........................................................................... 13-6 Pushbuttons and Lamps .......................................................... 13-6 Coin Handling Interface............................................................ 13-7 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................. 13-10 Connector Pin Assignment ................................................. 13-11

Revision 01

13-1

I/O Driver Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 13-1 Figure 13-2 Figure 13-3 Figure 13-4 Figure 13-5 I/O Driver Board - Location ........................................................................13-3 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram ..............................................................13-4 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout...........................................13-5 Coin Handling Interface Signals .................................................................13-7 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals ....................................................13-8

List of Tables
Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation ...........................................................13-8 Table 13-2 LED Functions.............................................................................................13-9

13-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I/O Driver Board

13.1 Physical Description


The MVP gaming machine is fitted with the MkV Series II I/O Driver Board II Part No. 2501-410415. The I/O Driver Board is located inside the logic cage where it connects directly to the Interface Board (see Figure 13-1). Nylon slots are provided on the inside of the logic cage to guide the I/O Driver Board into position.
Logic Cage

Main Board

I/O Driver Board

I0094

I/O Expansion Board or LAB Communications Board (if fitted)

Interface Board

Figure 13-1 I/O Driver Board - Location

13.1.1 Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations


For further information and for reference, the following additional information on the I/O Driver Board is provided in Volume II:

Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams. I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

13.2 Functional Description


The I/O Driver Board provides an interface between some of the machine equipment and the Main Board via the Interface Board (see Figure 13-2). The SPI Bus on the Main Board is connected to the I/O Driver Board, allowing the Main Board to address all I/O attached to the I/O Driver Board. The following machine equipment is connected to the I/O Driver Board.

Revision 01

13-3

I/O Driver Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Lamps Pushbuttons Bill Acceptor LEDs Coin Management Devices

+24 V

+22.5 V

+5 V

12 V Regulator

+12 V

GND

I0124

Figure 13-2 I/O Driver Board - Block Diagram

13-4

Revision 01

MKV SERIES
U1 L5

2 DRIVER 2 ISSUE
REV 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

PCBA 2501-410415
C50 U10 U15 R157 R158 C65 R159 R160 C63 R115 Y1 R146 JP1 C66 R164 R163 C51 C55 R127 R139 R140 C52 R141 R106 R142 C56 R131 R130 C72

A01

VR02 R4 R32 R121 R109 C53 C40 U2 R86 U9 D24 R72 R5 R73 R87 C49 R74 R46 R45 R58 R59 R57 C41 R75 R15 R76 R77 R88 C39 C15 C16 C17 R48 R78 C42 R96 R90 U4 R81 Q1 R91 R82 R83 C38 C11 C19 R29 C25 R39 C30 R53 C36 R67 R94 R98 C59 C43 R92 C47 U7 R97 R101 R112 R118 U12 C58 R100 R111 R117 R129 R79 R80 R64 R18 R17 R28 R27 R38 R37 R52 R51 R66 R65 R63 C18 R49 R50 C46 C29 C37 C35 R62 C24 R36 C28 R47 C34 R61 R60 R89 U3 U6 R16 C10 R99 R110 C45 C54 R116 R125 R124 U11 R26 R25 R24 R13 R23 R135 R103 R84 R122 R123 R56 C33 U13 R134 C22 C2 C3 C23 R42 C27 C8 C9 C13 C14 D3 D18 D4 D5 D8 D12 D15 R133 R12 R22

R40

C62

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

VR05

R143 LED3 R153 U14

VR04

20

VR08

VR09

VR06

VR10

VR12

VR14

R33 R43 R44 R35 R34

C57

C64 R144 R147 U16

VR13

10

R14

C61 C60 R148

R166 C70 C71 R149 R150 Q2 R145 R151 R155 U17 R167 R168 R169

L2

L3

L4

VR11

VR15

VR16

A B C

R19

C68 R170

Figure 13-3 I/O Driver Board 410415 - Component Layout

R6

R7

R8

C4

R9

C5

R171

LEISURE

INDUSTRIES

1996

R102

R113

R119 R128

R138

R152

R156 R162

C69

I/O Driver Board

DRIVLAY1.CDR

NOD: 2B

VR07

1B

VR03

1A

Revision 01
C20 C6

0801-410414

L1

D1 D2 C48 D9 R85

+
C32 C31 D10 D13 D16 D19 D22

J1 R69 D6

A B C7 C12 C26 R30

32

C1

30

LED1

R2 D7 R54 R108 R120 R126 D11 D14 D17 U8

R3 R11 R10 C21 R21 R20 R31 R41

VR01

C67

R165 LED2

13-5

I/O Driver Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

13.2.1 Power Supply


The I/O Driver Board receives 24 V DC from the power supply assembly and 5 V DC from the Main Board. The 24 V DC is reduced to 22.5 V DC by voltage dropping diodes and supplied to the pushbutton lamps and switches. A switched-mode regulator on the I/O Driver Board is used to generate 12 V DC from the 24 V DC supply. This voltage is supplied to the coin handling system, the Main Board, and the optional fan.

13.2.2 Pushbuttons and Lamps


The I/O Driver Board drives the pushbutton lamps and receives the inputs from the player pushbutton switches. Sixteen pushbutton lamp outputs are available. The lamps are rated at 24 V DC and 2 W. The lamp outputs are latched into two latches. During the power-up phase, the latches are reset to ensure all lamps are off. The lamps are driven by drivers with short-circuit protected outputs. The I/O Driver Board sinks the lamp current to drive the lamps. Each driver can sink a maximum of 700 mA at 24 V DC. The lamps are supplied with 22.5 V rather than 24 V to increase their lifetime. All lamp outputs include warm-up resistors (2.4 k, 0.6 W) to protect the lamp drivers against high current peaks when the lamps are turned on. Similarly, sixteen pushbutton switch inputs are provided. The 24 V DC pushbutton switch signals are converted to TTL levels by voltage dividers and then input to latches. These inputs are filtered to reduce bouncing of the signal caused when players strike a pushbutton. Animation lamps and light tower lamps, if fitted, are driven in the same manner. The I/O Driver Board also provides outputs for seven bill acceptor LEDs and one bill acceptor backlight. EMI Protection Transient Voltage Suppressors (TVSs) are included on all sixteen pushbutton lamp outputs to protect against electromagnetic interference (EMI). The board also has a 100 nF capacitor used with the NERESET signal. This component also protects against EMI.

13-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I/O Driver Board

13.2.3 Coin Handling Interface


A switch mode regulator on the I/O Driver Board generates 12 V DC 5% from the +24 V supply to power the coin handling system. The coin handling system interfaces with the I/O Driver Board via the 24-pin connector P12 on the Interface Board. This connector also distributes the signals to the speakers and the door optical security sensor. The coin handling interface section of the I/O Driver Board generates the signals NOD1A, NOD1B, "NOD2A", "S7 ALARM", and "AUDIT" and transfers these to the Main Board. It receives the signals NEODLEDON, NECOINBLK and NECOINDIV from the Main Board and converts these into the form required by the coin handling system. The coin handling system used in the Mk4/5XR machines is the Condor CN133A Validator, with separate diverter and diverter position detector. The signals to and from the coin handling assembly are shown in Figure 13-4 and explained in Table 13-1. Timing diagrams for the output signals to the Main Board are shown in Figure 13-5.
LED 1-3 Jumper Link JP1

Main Board
I0096

I/O Driver Board

Coin Handling Assembly

Figure 13-4 Coin Handling Interface Signals

Revision 01

13-7

I/O Driver Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Table 13-1 Coin Handling Signals - Explanation

Signal Name
CSENSE CCREDIT CERROR ACCUMPRICE S7ERROR CDIVPOS NODLEDON NCOINBLK NOD1A NOD1B NOD2B S7ALARM AUDIT CENABLE
25ms

Explanation
Coin Sense Signal from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low) Credit Signal Output from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low) Error Signal Output from CC-62/CC-46/Condor (Active Low) Accumulated Price output from S7 Validator (Active Low) Error Signal Output from S7 Validator (Active High) Coin Diverter Position Detect from Optics Test Optics Signal from Main Board Disable/Enable Coin Validator from Main Board Upper Coin Optic to Main Board Lower Coin Optic to Main Board Cashbox Optic to Main Board Simulated Valid Coin Pulse to Main Board Audit Signal input to Main Board Enable/Disable Output to Coin Validator from Driver Board
25ms

NOD1A NOD1B NOD2B S7ALARM AUDIT


Valid Coin

NOD1A NOD1B NOD2B S7ALARM AUDIT


500ms

Yo-Yo

NOD1A NOD1B NOD2B S7ALARM AUDIT


I0097

Coin Fault

Figure 13-5 Timing of Coin Handling Output Signals

Jumper Link (JP1) To configure the logic properly, the jumper link JP1 should present for the Condor coin validator.

13-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I/O Driver Board

Diagnostic LEDs Three LEDs are located on the front of the board to indicate the status of certain conditions (see the table below).
Table 13-2 LED Functions

Condition
No Activity Valid Coin to Hopper Valid Coin to Cashbox Error (or Yo-Yo) Fault

Red-LED1
Off Pulse Pulse Continuous Continuous

Red-LED2
Off Pulse Pulse Continuous Continuous

Green-LED
Off Off Pulse Off Continuous

Revision 01

13-9

I/O Driver Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

13.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures


CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical contact with components. PCBAs should be handled by their edges. ESD items should not be placed on metal surfaces.

CAUTION
When handling PCBAs, take care to avoid flexing the PCBA. Flexing may cause physical damage.

Removal To remove the I/O Driver Board 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Open the logic cage door. Standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be followed when removing PCBAs. Release the I/O Driver Board from its connected position using the extractor handles. Withdraw the board from the logic cage. Place the I/O Driver Board on an antistatic bag immediately. Note
A Fault Tag must be placed on a faulty board.

Replacement The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.

13-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I/O Driver Board

13.4 Connector Pin Assignment


A 96-way DIN41612 connector provides all inputs and outputs to the Interface Board.
Pin
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 A3 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10 A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13 A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15 A16 B16 C16 A17 B17 C17

Signal
GNDA GNDA AUDIT PBIN1 /ESPIDOUT /ESIOE4 PBIN2 PBIN3 /ESIOE5 PBIN4 PBIN5 ESCLK PBIN6 PBIN7 /ESPIDIN4 PBIN8 PBIN9 /SPIDIN5 PBIN10 PBLMP1 ESPIRST GNDA GNDA GNDA PBLMP2 PBLMP3 PBLMP4 P22V5 P22V5 P22V5 P22V5 VCC VCC PBLMP5 P12V P12V PBLMP6 PBLMP7 PBLMP8 PBLMP9 GNDA GNDA PBLMP10 PBIN11 MSSO0 PBIN12 PBIN13 MSS0 PBIN14 PBIN15 MSSO1

Function
Signal/power ground Signal/power ground Connected to DACOM 3000 Push Button Input 1 SPI Data Out from Main Board SPI Channel 4 (Door output) Enable Push Button Input 2 Push Button Input 3 SPI Channel 5 (Door output) Enable Push Button Input 4 Push Button Input 5 SPI Clock Push Button Input 6 Push Button Input 7 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board Push Button Input 8 Push Button Input 9 SPI Cannel 4 Data In to Main board Push Button Input 10 Push Button Lamp Output 1 SPI Reset from Main board Signal/power ground Signal/power ground Signal/power ground Push Button Lamp Output 2 Push Button Lamp Output 3 Push Button Lamp Output 4 +22.5 volts for lamp +22.5 volts for lamp +22.5 volts for lamp +22.5 volts for lamp +5 volts from Main board +5 volts from Main board Push Button Lamp Output 5 +12 volts for main board and coin validator +12 volts for main board and coin validator Push Button Lamp Output 6 Push Button Lamp Output 7 Push Button Lamp Output 8 Push Button Lamp Output 9 Signal/power ground Signal/power ground Push Button Lamp Output 10 Push Button Input 11 Mechanical security switch 0 normally open Push Button Input 12 Push Button Input 13 Mechanical security switch 0 normally closed Push Button Input 14 Push Button Input 15 Mechanical security switch 1 normally open

Revision 01

13-11

I/O Driver Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32

PBIN16 PBLMP11 MSS1 PBLMP12 PBLMP13 MSSO2 S7ALARM GNDA GNDA PBLMP14 PBLMP15 MSS2 PBLMP16 CCREDIT MSSO3 CSENSE CERROR MSS3 ACCUMPRICE S7ERROR /ECOINDIV CDIVPOS CENABLE /ECOINBLK /ERESET GNDA GNDA /CDIVERT DNOMLED1 /EODLEDON DNOMLED2 DNOMLED3 VBAT0 DNOMLED4 DNOMLED5 NOD2A DNOMLED6 DNOMLED7 NOD1B BKLITE NOD1A P24VA P24VA P24VA P24VA

Push Button Input 16 Push Button Lamp Output 11 Mechanical security switch 1 normally closed Push Button Lamp Output 12 Push Button Lamp Output 13 Mechanical security switch 2 normally open S7 signal to the main board Signal/power ground Signal/power ground Push Button Lamp Output 14 Push Button Lamp Output 15 Mechanical security switch 2 normally closed Push Button Lamp Output 16 Coin credit pulse Mechanical security switch 3 normally open Coin Sense output from coin validator Coin Error signal from coin validator Mechanical security switch 3 normally closed Accumulated coin output from S7 validator S7 error signal from S7 validator - also connected to S7ALARM of main board Coin diverter signal from main board Coin diverter position from coin chute Coin validator enable signal Coin block solenoid output from main board Reset Signal/power ground Signal/power ground Coin diverter solenoid output to coin chute Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 1 NOD LED enable form main board Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 2 Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 3 Battery 0 output from main board Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 4 Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 5 Cash box Optic Detector 2A Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 6 Bill Acceptor Denomination LED 7 Coin Optic Detector 1B BACC Back Light output Coin Optic Detector 1A +24 V power +24 V power +24 V power +24 V power

13-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Communications Configuration Board

________Chapter 14________
Communications Configuration Board 410217
14.1 14.2 14.3 14.4 14.5 Physical Description .............................................................. 14-3 Functional Description .......................................................... 14-4 Removal and Replacement Procedures ............................... 14-6 Connector Pin Assignments ................................................. 14-7 General Maintenance ............................................................. 14-7

Revision 01

14-1

Communications Configuration Board

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location ......................................14-3 Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram ............................14-4

14-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Communications Configuration Board

14.1 Physical Description


The Communications Configuration Board (CCB) is located within the logic cage where it connects to the Main Board via a 72-pin SIMM socket (see Figure 14-1). The CCB is used to configure the internal serial communications ports 1, 2 and 3 for various signal levels. Each channel connects to a 16-way Minifit connector on the Interface Board. Channel 3 also connects to a 10-way ribbon cable connector for the DACOM.

Communications Configuration Board Logic Cage

72-Pin SIMM Socket Main Board

I0090

Interface Board

Figure 14-1 Communications Configuration Board - Location

For further information and for reference, the following additional information on the Communications Configuration Board is provided in Volume II:

Circuit diagrams. Structured circuit diagrams. I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

Revision 01

14-3

Communications Configuration Board

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

14.2 Functional Description


The Main Board has four serial channels - 0, 1, 2 and 3. Channel 0 is reserved for communications with a Touchscreen interface or a Serial Keno Panel interface. Channels 1, 2 and 3 are fully isolated and can be configured using the Communications Configuration Board. The CCB plugs into the Main Board via a standard 72-pin SIMM socket and converts the opto-coupled UART serial and I/O signals into the desired signal levels. There are several different CCBs used to configure the communications channels for different signals to suit different markets. The table below shows the configuration for PCBA 410217.
Channel 1
Bank Note Acceptor

Channel 2
RS232

Channel 3

The connectors on the Interface Board used for the serial channels are as follows:
Channel 0
P14

Channel 1
P18

Channel 2
P15

Channel 3
P17

The serial channels are supplied with isolated 12 V at 100 mA from the Main Board, as well as +5 V to run the logic circuits.
FIP Display

Serial Channel 0

DACOM/BIPS

Opto-Isolators Serial Channel 1 Serial Channel 2 Serial Channel 3

Communications Configuration Board

Devices: Bank Note Acceptor IGT Interface RS 232 RS 485 DACOM 5000 Touch Screen Other...

+12 V -12 V

I0091

Figure 14-2 Communications Configuration Board - Block Diagram

14-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Communications Configuration Board

Bank Note Acceptor Interface The bank note acceptor interface provides TTL/CMOS communication (serial input only from bank note acceptor) with handshaking. The data transfer rate is 600 baud, 8 bit data, 1 start bit, 1 stop bit and no parity. This port uses the 16-way Minifit connector P18 on the Interface Board. The serial protocol is 'one way' in that the bank note acceptor sends to the host an ASCII code, depending on the type of note inserted or the status of the bank note acceptor. The host enables, disables or accepts the note via two control lines ACCEPT ENABLE and SEND. RS232 Interface This interface provides RS232 communications between the Main Board and an external interface board. The channel has six I/O signals, including data I/O. The opto LED drivers on the Main Board are configured to an OFF state when the line is inactive or not connected to minimise power consumption. This port can be run at a minimum 9600 baud rate.

Revision 01

14-5

Communications Configuration Board

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

14.3 Removal and Replacement Procedures


CAUTION
When handling electrostatic devices (ESDs) such as PCBAs, take care to avoid physical contact with components. Handle PCBAs by their edges. Do not place ESD items on metal surfaces. When handling PCBAs, take care to avoid flexing the PCBA. Flexing may cause physical damage.

To remove the Communications Configuration Board (see Figure 14-1): 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. Open the cabinet door, and switch OFF the machine. Open the logic cage door. Standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be followed when removing PCBAs. Release the Main Board using the extractor pins, and withdraw it from the logic cage. Locate the Communications Configuration Board sitting perpendicular to the Main Board in the top left. Release both of the two metal spring retainers located on each side of the PCBA. Remove the board by lifting it upwards while holding the Main Board steady. Note
A fault tag must be placed on a faulty PCBA.

To replace the Communications Configuration Board: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Standard Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) prevention procedures should be followed when replacing PCBAs. Remove the replacement board from the antistatic bag. Inspect both sides of the board for any signs of physical damage. Press the Communications Configuration Board into position on the Main Board. Slide the Main Board into the correct logic cage grooves and gently move the board into position on the Interface Board. Close the logic cage door. Switch the machine on, and close the cabinet door. Note
Run relevant machine tests after replacing the Communications Configuration Board.

14-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Communications Configuration Board

14.4 Connector Pin Assignments


For a listing of the 72 pin connector assignment to the Main Board, refer to the Main Board chapter. The pin assignments for the serial channel connectors P14, P15, P17, and P18 are listed in the relevant sections of the Interface Board chapter.

14.5 General Maintenance


CAUTION
Do not attempt component level repair without access to a workshop facility.

For general maintenance of the Communications Configuration Board:


Remove any dust or dirt from external surfaces. Make sure that all contacts on the PCBA and in the SIMM socket on the Main Board are clean. Check that the connectors are in good condition and secure.

Revision 01

14-7

Communications Configuration Board

NSW MK4/5 Video Service Manual

Notes

14-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

______Chapter 15______
LAB Communications Board 410174
Note: Chapter includes LAB Communications PSU Fusing and Serial Interface Card Mounting Chassis (PSU Chassis)

15.1 15.1.1 15.1.2 15.1.3 15.2 15.2.1 15.2.2 15.3 15.3.1 15.4

Technical Description ............................................................ 15-3 Physical Description ................................................................. 15-3 Basic Operation........................................................................ 15-6 LAB PSU Chassis Description ................................................. 15-7 Removal and Replacement.................................................. 15-10 Removal ................................................................................. 15-10 Replacement .......................................................................... 15-10 Connector Pin Assignments ............................................... 15-11 Interface Board Slot P6 .......................................................... 15-11 General Maintenance ........................................................... 15-13

Revision 01

15-1

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 15-1 Figure 15-2 Figure 15-3 Figure 15-4 Figure 15-5 Figure 15-6 LAB Communications Board - position in logic cage ...................................... 15-3 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout ......................................... 15-5 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram ................................................ 15-6 LAB PSU Chassis ........................................................................................... 15-8 PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring ........................................... 15-8 LAB Communications Board and PSU Kit ...................................................... 15-9

List of Tables
Table 15-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout............................................................................................. 15-4 Table 15-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout........................................................................................ 15-4 Table 15-3 Interface Board Bus Connector for LAB Communications Board .................. 15-11

15-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

15.1
15.1.1

Technical Description
Physical Description
The LAB communications board is mounted inside the logic cage below the main board and is perpendicularly mounted to the interface board via a 96 way right angled DIN41612 connector (see Figure 15-1). It consists of one bi-directional and five uni-directional RS422 serial ports which communicate with various types of subsidiary equipment.

Logic Cage

Main Board

I/O Driver Board

I0076

I/O Expansion Board or LAB Communications Board (if fitted)

Interface Board

Figure 15-1 LAB Communications Board - position in logic cage

The LAB communications board is designed to comply with the relevant LAB requirements, namely: Provision for 6 ports P1 to P6, with P1 being bi-directional whilst ports P2 P6 are uni-directional. Each port operating in conformance to the RS 422 standard as described in the LAB guidelines with the addition of pull up/down resistors at the RS422 receiver inputs of particular signal lines. Transmission from each port being asynchronous at 9600 bps. A power good status output signal provided at each port. A subsidiary equipment function (SEF) status input signal received at each port from an external source. All unused ports capped with power good status output signals fed back through the SEF status input line.

Revision 01

15-3

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

The port 1 connector is a 10 pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type with the pinouts as shown in the following table.
Table 15-1 LAB Port 1 Pinout

Pin
1 2, 3 4, 5 6, 7 8, 9

Signal Name
Common Tx Data Rx Data Power Good SEF

Signal Function
Signal GND Transmit Data Receive Data EGM Power is Normal Subsidiary Equipment Functioning Normally Status

Signal Direction
From LAB Comms Board To LAB Comms Board From LAB Comms Board To LAB Comms Board

The connectors for ports 2-6 are 10 pin Amphenol 816 (short) series type with the pinouts as shown in the following table.
Table 15-2 LAB Ports 2-6 Pinout Pin 1 2, 3 6, 7 8, 9 Signal Name Common Tx Data Power Good SEF Signal Function Signal GND Transmit Data EGM Logic Power is normal Subsidiary Equipment Functioning Normally Status Signal Direction _ From LAB Comms Board From LAB Comms Board To LAB Comms Board

Circuit Diagrams and Component Locations For further information and for reference, the following additional information on the LAB Communications Board is provided in Volume II:

Circuit diagrams. I/O to Components and ICs. A list of the I/O paths to each component and integrated circuit (IC) pin position.

Figure 15-2 shows the component layout of the LAB Board.

15-4

Revision 01

Revision 01
C29 R79 R81 C2 C49 U14 R76 R80 U8 C33 C32 C31 C30 C81 C50 R38 R37 R34 R33 R78 R77

C1

P6

P5

C24 R82 R86 C46 C19 R3 R91 R93 C43 C4 R75 R70 U7 U16 R88 R92 R4 R5 C3 U10 U15 R87 R85

U9

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

U1

C28 C27 C26 C25 C48 C47 R46 R45 R42 R41 R84 R83

P4

P3

C23 C22 C21 C20 C45 C44

R54 R53 R50 R49 R90 R89

C56

R94 R1 C40 U13 R72 R71

R95 C5 U6 U12

C18 C17 C16 C15 C42 C41

R30 R20 R26 R25 R74 R73

R2 C57 C39 C4 R6 C34

U3

R69 R66 R65 U5 R64

P1

P2

C54

C14 C13 C12 C11 C53 C52

R22 R21 R18 R17 R68 R67

Figure 15-2 LAB Communications Board - Component Layout


U11
R63 R60 R59 R55

LEISURE INDUSTRIES

LAB Communications Board

MK V LAB COMMS BOARD PCB 0801-410175 PCBA 2501-410174 ISSUE REV

C10 C9 C8 C7 C36 C37 C36 C35

R14 R13 R10 R9 R62 R61 R58 R67

I0100

15-5

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

15.1.2

Basic Operation
A brief description of the functionality of the LAB communications board is provided in this section. See Figure 15-3.

96 Way Main I/F Bus Connector


EA5 . . . EA12 EA13 /DACK IDO ID1

GAL 16V8 (PLD)


I1

Dual UART with Parallel Port (16c452)


CSA CSB CSP A0 A1 A2 /IOR /IOW

TxA RxA TxB PD0 PD1 . . PD5

I6 I/o0 I/o1 I/o2 I/o7 IO I/o3

RS 422 Drivers (DS9638) 10 Way Straight Receivers (DS9639) Headers and EMC Line Filters Port 1 1 2(+) Txt Data 3(-) 6(+) Power Good 7(-) 4(+) Rx1 Data 5(-) 8(+) SEF 9(-) 1 2(+) 3(-) 6(+) 7(-) 4(+) 5(-) 8(+) 9(-) 1 2(+) 3(-) 6(+) 7(-) 4(+) 5(-) 8(+) 9(-) Port 2
Txt Dat

EA2 EA3 EA4 /EIOR /EIOW EILO /EREST ECLK8M EDO-ED7


I0101

I9

Int A Int B Reset Clk D0-D7

Power Good

SEF

Port 6
Txt Data

74HC04

Power Good

SEF

Figure 15-3 LAB Communications Board - Block Diagram

The LAB Communications Board provides six ports P1, P2, P3, P4, P5 and P6. Port P1 is bi-directional and receives communications from the equipment connected to the corresponding port of the SESI (Subsidiary Equipment Serial Interface). The port P1 is reserved for Centralised Cash Control Equipment (CCCE). Ports P2 to P6 are uni directional and do not receive communications from subsidiary equipment. Each port operates in conformance to the RS 422 standard with the speed of the transmissions being 9600 bps. Each character or digit is represented by 11 bits (1 start bit + 8 data bits (packed BCD) + 1 parity bit (even) + 1 stop bit). The data byte is transmitted with LSB first, parity transmitted after the MSB. In addition to the usual RX and TX data signals, each port provides a "power good" status signal to and receives a "Subsidiary Equipment Function" (SEF) status signal from the SESI.

15-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

The "power good" status signal is an indication of the integrity of the power supply level on the EGM main logic board and hence the LAB communications board. The signal operates such that the differential voltage at the output of the line driver is negative (Vd = -V) whenever the main logic board and any other "sensitive" subsidiary boards (eg LAB Comms board) have "normal" power applied. Under all other conditions the line driver differential voltage is positive (Vd = +V). The manufacturer of the SESI must ensure that the other power fail conditions which may cause the output of the line driver to assume zero voltage or high impedance are detected correctly. The SEF status signal is an indication to the gaming machine that subsidiary equipment connected is functioning correctly or that a request has been made for play suspension. Under "normal" conditions the SEF differential signal voltage at the line driver output is negative (Vd = -V). A positive signal (Vd = +V) is to be interpreted by the gaming machine as a request to suspend play. "Fail" conditions which may cause the output of the line driver to assume zero voltage or high impedance must also be interpreted as a request to suspend play. All unused ports will be "capped". In the "cap" for the connector, pins 6 and 7 (power good) are linked to pins 8 and 9 (SEF) respectively so that the gaming machine can be provided with the SEF input signal.

15.1.3

LAB PSU Chassis Description


The LAB Comms PSU Fusing and Serial I/F Card Mounting Chassis (PSU chassis is located behind the video monitor and provides power connections to the six subsidiary equipment interfaces (third party vendor equipment). Each connection is capable of supplying 12Vrms (nominal) AC at 0.5A. Each output connection from the PSU chassis is protected by a 0.5A fuse. Note that the PSU transformer (or winding) is part of the EGM main power supply transformer via a separate winding. The machine power supply provides the LAB Comms PSU with isolated 12 Vrms AC at 3 A, via a flying lead from the 2-way connector JP29 on the Interface Board. This power is supplied from a separate winding in the machine power supply.

Revision 01

15-7

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

I0102

Mounting Holes

Connector Fuse Holder

Figure 15-4 LAB PSU Chassis

The wire leading from pin 1 of the flying lead connector is connected in parallel fashion to all 6 fuse holders and hence fuses. The outer terminal (contact) of each fuse holder (fuse) is wired to pin 2 of its corresponding 3 way power output connector. The wire leading from pin 2 of the flying lead connector is connected in parallel fashion to pin 2 of each of these power output connectors. Pin 3 of each power output connector is unused. In this way, 6, 12Vrms/0.5A power output connections are provided by the LAB Communications PSU.

Connectors

C1

C2

C3

C4

C5

C6

1 2 3

1 2 3

Fuses

F1

F2

F3

F4

F5

F6

12 V AC Input
I0103

Figure 15-5 PSU Chassis - PSU Fuse and Connector Wiring

15-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

PSU Fusing and Serial Interface Card Mounting Chassis (Located behing the video monitor)

12 V AC

Interface Board
Main Board Logic Cage LAB Communications Board
29 V AC 28 V AC 12 V AC

Six loom ribbon cable

Power Supply
I0104

Figure 15-6 LAB Communications Board and PSU Kit

Revision 01

15-9

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

15.2

Removal and Replacement


CAUTION
When handling electrostatic sensitive devices (ESDs) such as PCBs, take care to avoid physical contact with components. PCBs should be handled by their edges. ESD items should not be placed on metal surfaces.

15.2.1
1. 2. 3. 4.

Removal
To remove the LAB communications board: Open the cabinet door. Switch the machine OFF. The main switch is located on the power supply unit located in the bottom right hand corner of the machine. Open the logic cage door. Touch the side of the door for several seconds to ensure your body is at the same potential as the board you are about to remove. This precaution is necessary to minimise damage to the boards from electrostatic discharge. Full electrostatic precautions are not practical in many gaming environments. Release the board from a connected position by using the board extractors pins. Disconnect any looms to the board. Withdraw the board from the logic cage and place in an antistatic bag immediately.

5. 6.

15.2.2
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

Replacement
To replace: Touch the side of the door for several seconds to ensure your body is at the same potential as the machine. Remove the replacement board from the antistatic bag. Inspect both sides of the board for any signs of physical damage. Reconnect the looms to the board. Slide the board into the correct logic cage grooves and gently move the board into position on the interface board. Close the logic cage door. Switch the machine on. Close the cabinet door.

15-10

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

15.3

Connector Pin Assignments


The following tables list each pin on each input or output plug of the door distribution board, the destination IC and pin number, function description and signal name.

15.3.1

Interface Board Slot P6


The connector pin assignments are detailed in the following table:
Table 15-3 Interface Board Bus Connector for LAB Communications Board

Pin
A1 B1 C1 A2 B2 C2 B3 C3 A4 B4 C4 A5 B5 C5 A6 B6 C6 A7 B7 C7 A8 B8 C8 A9 B9 C9 A10 B10 C10 A11 B11 C11 A12 B12 C12 A13 B13 C13 A14 B14 C14 A15 B15 C15

Pin Name
GNDD

Comment
--Ground ----------Ground --Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NC ------Ground Logic Door Security Switch 7 contact - NO --------Ground ----------Ground ----------Ground ----------Ground --------configuration pin, specify card number Ground configuration pin, specify card number

GNDD MSS0

GNDD MSSO0

GNDD

GNDD

GNDD

GNDD

GNDD GNDD VCC

Revision 01

15-11

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

A16 B16 C16 A17 B17 C17 A18 B18 C18 A19 B19 C19 A20 B20 C20 A21 B21 C21 A22 B22 C22 A23 B23 C23 A24 B24 C24 A25 B25 C25 A26 B26 C26 A27 B27 C27 A28 B28 C28 A29 B29 C29 A30 B30 C30 A31 B31 C31 A32 B32 C32

VCC VCC VCC RNW GNDD /EIF EFHO /DACK /EFL GNDD /EIL0 /ERESET /EIOW /EIOR EA13 GNDD ECLK8M EA10 EA11 EA12 EA8 GNDD EA9 EA5 EA6 EA7 EA3 GNDD EA4 VBATE /PFAIL EA2 GNDD ED5 ED6 ED7 ED3 GNDD ED4 ED0 ED1 ED2 GNDD GNDD GNDD P24VD

+5V from main board, converted from 24V +5V from main board, converted from 24V +5V from main board, converted from 24V CPU, read not write signal Ground --CPU, IF interrupt CPU, FH0 interrupt CPU, data acknowledge CPU, FL interrupt Ground CPU, IL0 interrupt CPU, external reset output CPU, IO write signal CPU, IO read signal CPU, address bus Ground CPU, clock signal CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus Ground CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus CPU, address bus Ground CPU, address bus external battery backup power fail signal CPU, address bus --Ground --CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus Ground CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus CPU, data bus Ground --Ground --Ground +24V

15-12

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

LAB Communications Board

15.4

General Maintenance
CAUTION
Do not attempt component level repair without access to a workshop facility.

For general maintenance of the LAB communications board:


Remove any dust or dirt from the external surfaces. Check that all plugs are secure.

Revision 01

15-13

LAB Communications Board

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

15-14

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Progressive Jackpot System

______Chapter 16______
Progressive Jackpot System
16.1 16.2. Overview ................................................................................. 16-3 Progressive SEI Board (410227) ........................................... 16-3

Revision 01

16-1

Progressive Jackpot System

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures
Figure 16-1 SEI Board - data flows ...............................................................................16-4 Figure 16-2 Cashcade - data flows................................................................................16-6

List of Tables
Table 16-1 Table 16-2 Table 16-3 Table 16-4 Table 16-5 Table 16-6 SEI Board Configurations............................................................................16-3 DIP Switch Settings .....................................................................................16-5 Mikohn Interface..........................................................................................16-7 Machine Interface........................................................................................16-7 CDS Display Interface .................................................................................16-8 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface ...........................................................16-8

16-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Progressive Jackpot System

16.1 Overview
The Mk4/5XR gaming machines can be configured to provide for Mystery Cashcade Jackpots. In a Mystery Cashcade Jackpot system, a number of machines are linked together through a Controller, which is external to the gaming machine. As each game is played, pulses are sent to the Controller from each of the gaming machines, initiating the accumulation of a Cashcade Jackpot amount, which is shown on a central display unit connected to the Controller. The jackpot is won when the Cashcade Jackpot amount reaches some randomly selected value between predetermined limits. The jackpot value is transmitted from the Controller to the winning machine. Machines may be configured to offer several different combinations of link, or cashcade jackpots. Typical configurations provide two, three, or four jackpot amounts (termed Double, Triple, or Quad Jackpots).

16.2. Progressive SEI Board (410227)


Overview The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) Board (Part No.410227) enables LAB RS-422 Communications to be converted to DACOM 5000 signals for a Mikohn CON2 pulse system. The SEI Board can also receive information back from the controller such that when a Mystery Cashcade Jackpot is won, the Subsidiary Equipment Function line is activated until the jackpot is reset, causing the machine to lock up. The SEI Board allows for both Mystery Cashcade and Link Progressive Jackpot games to be connected to the gaming machine. The SEI Board can also be used to connect the gaming machine to a BIPs Cashless Transfer system. To support the BIPS interface, the serial ports have to provide 2way communication ports (Mikohn CON2 controllers only require one-way communication ports). Figure 13-1 shows the SEI Board connections. The SEI Board is mounted on a plate and the assembly is then mounted into the subsidiary equipment board mounting plate. The table below shows the possible board configurations:
Table 16-1 SEI Board Configurations Option 1 Option 2 Option 3 Pulse Progressive system Serial Progressive system BIPs System P5 and P6 inputs P5 input P1 in/output two DACOM 5000 inputs RS-422 in/out DACOM 5000 in/output two pulse outputs CDS display output CDS display output CDS Display output LED out

Revision 01

16-3

Progressive Jackpot System

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

CDS Display Controller

Optically Isolated Transmission at 9600 baud RS-422 communications at 9600 baud P5 or P1 SEF LAB Communication Board P6 PWR GOOD J1 J9 Machine ID and Option Dipswitches

Subsidiary Equipment Interface


J2
CON2-1 CON2-2

SEF

J5 J3

J4

J8

J6

J10

Power Supply

LED
Optically Isolated Pulsed Output Optically Isolated Input at 2400 baud RS-422/485 port 19200 baud

jpotflow.cdr

Connection to first Controller System (Mikohn CON2-1)

Connection to second Controller System (Mikohn CON2-2)

Figure 16-1 SEI Board - data flows

Functional Description The SEI Board is controlled by a Zilog Z8S180 microprocessor. This microprocessor has two embedded UART channels that support two serial ports on the SEI Board. An external DUART is used to provide two additional serial ports. Therefore, four channels are provided for the DACOM 5000 or RS-422/485 communication interface. Jumper link J11 is used to select between DACOM 5000 and RS-422/485. The baud rates of these ports are as follows:

DACOM 5000 type interface: up to 9600 baud max. RS-422/485 type interface: up to 19200 baud max.

The Z8S180 is an 8-bit microprocessor. It supports operating frequencies up to 16 MHz and provides two Asynchronous Serial Communication Interface (ASCI) channels. The Z8S180 can address up to 1 Mbyte of memory. There are 32 Kbyte RAM and 64 Kbyte ROM available on the SEI Board. In case of power failure or brown outs, the power supply to the SEI Board is guaranteed for another 20 ms. This gives time for the status/data of the system to be stored in a non volatile RAM.

16-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Progressive Jackpot System

Option 1 - Jackpot Pulse System The Subsidiary Equipment Interface (SEI) has two connections, one to Port P5 and one to Port P6 on the LAB Communications Board. It also has two pulse outputs and two serial inputs to the two different progressive systems Mystery Cashcade and Link Progressive. An LED is used to indicate that pulses are being sent. The SEI translates the LAB Communication Protocol to the M09, Link Progressive protocol or the M00, Cashcade Jackpot Protocol, or both, depending on how the interface is configured. The SEI is configurable to allow for the jackpot type to be set, i.e. one Link Progressive and one Cashcade, or two Cashcade interfaces. The SEI has the ability to identify the machine so that they correspond to each of the Mikohn CON2 machine ID numbers. This is done by using DIP switches that allow for up to 40 ID numbers for each CON2 controller. When a Cashcade jackpot is won by a machine, the SEI in that machine activates the Subsidiary Equipment Function Line, causing the machine to lock until the jackpot is reset. The DIP Switch settings for the two CON2 controllers are shown below.
Table 16-2 DIP Switch Settings

CON2-1
SWITCH 1-6 7 8 Data Bit 0-5 6 7 Description Machine ID Spare Controller Type SWITCH 1-6 7 8

CON2-2
Data Bit 0-5 6 7 Description Machine ID Spare Controller type

DIP switch bit 8 enables each of the CON2 interfaces to be configured as a Link Progressive or Cashcade type controller. The SEI has the capability of driving a CDS Display for the Link Progressive Jackpot Prize. Mystery Cashcade Where the machine is configured for Mystery Cashcade jackpots without Linked Progressive jackpots, the SEI has only one connection (to P5) on the LAB Communications Board. In addition, the CDS display is not required. A block diagram of a Cashcade system is shown in Figure 16-2. Mystery Cashcade Jackpot Light A connection is provided for an external LED to advise the player the machine is still contributing to the Cashcade Jackpot. Option 2 - Jackpot Serial System An RS-485 I/F is also implemented on the SEI Board. This allows for serial communication between a controller and the machine. The RS-485 Port is connected parallel to the J10 port (DACOM 5000) and replaces the same.

Revision 01

16-5

Progressive Jackpot System

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

P5

RS-422 communications at 9600 baud SEF

J1

Subsidiary Equipment Interface

J8

Power Supply

LAB Communication Board

PWR GOOD

J3

LED

J5

J4

jpotflo2.cdr

Optically Isolated Pulsed Output Mikohn CON2 Controller

Optically Isolated DACOM 5000 Input at 2400 baud

Figure 16-2 Cashcade - data flows

Option 3 - BIPs Cashless Transfer System The SEI has a standard I/F that allows for connection to a BIPs system. In this case, the bi-directional port J1 of the SEI connects to the port 1 (P1) on the LAB Board and the bi-directional port J10 (DACOM 5000) on the SEI connects to the BIP system. Power Supply The SEI board is supplied with 12 V DC. An on-board rectifier and switch mode power supply regulator provide the logic with 5 V DC. The power supply is monitored and if the 12 V DC supply is missing more than a half wave (more than 20 ms delay), the POWER FAIL OUTPUT (PFO) signal is activated. From the time PFO becomes active, the system has about 100 ms to save the status of the current activities on the board and stops processing until PFO and RESET inputs become inactive again. Pulsed Interface to Mikohn CON2 controller The controller has an optically isolated connection to the interface. The basic link protocol (M09) is a 100 ms header followed by 50 ms pulses for each credit played. A 200 ms header is used to specify a Jackpot hit - used only by Link Progressive games, and followed by 50 ms pulses for the Jackpot type won, i.e. Jackpot 0 has one 50 ms pulse, and Jackpot 3 has four 50 ms pulses. To reset a combination hit a coin pulse must be sent, i.e a 100 ms header followed by a 50 ms pulse. The basic Mystery Cashcade protocol (M00) is 50 ms pulses for each credit played. No headers are required for this protocol.

16-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Progressive Jackpot System

Two pulsed outputs are provided via J5 and J6 on the SEI Board. Mystery Jackpot Light A connection for an external LED is available to advise the player the machine is still contributing to the Cashcade Jackpot. The jackpot light connects to J8 on the SEI Board. CON2 to Interface The machine receives information from the controller via an optically isolated DACOM 5000 input. This machine sends out the current Jackpot value, which is continuously updated, as well as the Jackpot win, and the machine ID. Two interfaces are provided via J4 and J10 on the SEI Board.
Table 16-3 Mikohn Interface

Pin Number
1 2 3 RxD COMMON TxD

Description

Interface to Machine The interface between J1 on the SEI and the machine is shown below.
Table 16-4 Machine Interface

Pin Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

Description
Common RX Data + RX Data TX Data + TX Data Power Good + Power Good Sub. Equipment Function + Sub. Equipment Function NC

Interface to CDS Display The connection to the CDS Display controller is via a DACOM 5000 uni-direction port, as shown in the table below. The display controller board connects to J9 on the SEI Board.

Revision 01

16-7

Progressive Jackpot System

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual Table 16-5 CDS Display Interface

Pin Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 RxD RxD COMMON COMMON TxD TxD COMMON COMMON RxD RxD

Description

Mikohn Serial Interface The SEI Board has one RS-422 port (J7) to support the Mikohn Serial Protocol CON2 RS-422/485 interface. The RS-422/485 is used instead of DACOM 5000 to talk to a CON2 controller. The optical isolation for this interface is on the Comms Inlet board. The SEI Board provides the RS-422/485 signals to the Comms Inlet board. The table below shows the pinout of the RS-422/485 connector.
Table 16-6 Mikohn RS-422/485 Serial Interface

Pin Number
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 GND TxDN TxDP DTRN DTRP RxDN RxDP DCDN DCDP NC

Description

Power Input The SEI receives 12 V DC at 0.5 A from the LAB Power Supply Unit. Power is connected to J3 on the SEI Board.

16-8

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Fault Finding

________Chapter 17________
Machine Fault Finding
17.1 Fault Finding ...................................................................................... 3

Revision 01

17-1

Machine Fault Finding

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Tables
Table 17-1 Fault Finding..................................................................................................... 3

17-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Fault Finding

17.1 Fault Finding


Table 17-1 Fault Finding

Fault
Equipment connected to auxiliary power sockets & has no power. Machine has no power.

Probable Cause
Auxiliary power socket fuse is blown. A. Mains socket supplying the machine is not live.

Action
Replace auxiliary power socket fuse. 1. Check that the mains socket is live. 2. If the mains socket is dead, check that the circuit breaker at the distribution board is on. 3. Turn off mains power for 5 seconds, then turn power on. 4. Check main board seating and links. If condition continues, replace the Main Board. 1. Clear coin jam from the Coin Chute Assembly. 2. Check that the hopper photo-optic detector is not damaged or disconnected. If the detector is damaged, replace the detector. 3. Check that the looms are correctly seated and have continuity. 4. If the looms are OK, replace the Backplane. 5. If there is still no power, replace the Main Board. 1. If only one lamp is faulty, replace the fluorescent tube or driver, or the pushbutton lamp or microswitch. 2. Check that the power supply assembly is operating correctly. If not, replace the power supply assembly. 3. Check cables and looms and ensure lamps are correctly seated.

B. Main board not showing 4 lit red LEDs (ie, sequential display). No power-up cycle. A. Coin jam in the Coin Chute Assembly. B. Faulty hopper photooptic detector.

C. Cable fault.

E. Faulty Interface Board. F. Faulty Main Board. Fluorescent lamps, animation lamp, and pushbutton lamps not lit. A. Faulty lamp or fluorescent driver.

B. Faulty power supply assembly.

C. Faulty loom between: the fluorescent lamps and the power supply assembly.

Revision 01

17-3

Machine Fault Finding

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Fault

Probable Cause
D. Faulty connection or loom between: the animation lamps / pushbutton lamps and Interface Board. the power supply assembly and the Interface Board. the Interface Board and the Main Board. the Interface Board and the Driver Board. E. Faulty Main Board.

Action
4. Check cables, looms, boards and lamps are correctly seated and have continuity.

5. If there are still no lamps lit, replace the Main Board. 1. Check that mains power is available at the power supply. See Power Supply Assembly. 2. Check that the mains power supply is available at the monitor. If available, replace the monitor. 3. Check that the looms are correctly seated and have continuity.

Video monitor blank.

A. Faulty power supply assembly. B. Faulty video monitor.

C. Faulty loom between the monitor and the power supply or between the Main Board and the monitor. D. Faulty Main Board. Video monitor colour or picture incorrect. A. Monitor settings incorrect.

4. If the condition persists, replace the Main Board. 1. Carry out Basic Colours Test from the Video Monitor Test Menu in Operator Mode. Work through the procedure for adjusting and testing the video monitor as detailed in the chapter Video Monitor.

B. Faulty monitor. YO-YO message while machine not being played. A. Coin jammed in the coin validator sensor assembly. B. Faulty coin validator. C. Fault in the loom between the coin validator and the Backplane. Sound too loud or too soft. A. Volume control requires adjustment.

2. If the condition persists, replace the monitor. 1. Remove jammed coin.

2. Replace the coin comparator. 3. Check that the loom is correctly seated and has continuity.

1. Adjust the volume using Sound System Setup in the Operator Setup / Selections Menu. 2. If the condition persists, replace the Main Board.

17-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Machine Fault Finding

Fault
No sound.

Probable Cause
A. Volume control requires adjustment. B. Speaker open circuit.

Action
1. Adjust the volume using Sound System Setup in the Operator Setup / Selections Menu. 2. Remove the connectors from the speaker terminals and check that there is 6 to 8 across the speaker terminals. If not, replace the speaker. Reconnect the speaker terminals. 3. If there is no power at the speaker, check that the looms are correctly seated and are physically sound. 4. If the looms are OK, replace the Interface Board. 5. If the condition persists, replace the Main Board. 1. Check that the loom is correctly seated and has continuity. 2. If motor is not operating, replace the hopper. 1. Remove hopper, dismantle it and remove foreign matter. 2. Replace the hopper. 3. Replace the hopper motor controller. 1. Check that the looms are correctly seated and have continuity.

C. Faulty loom between the Interface Board and the speaker. D. Faulty Interface Board E. Faulty Main Board. Hopper does not rotate. A. Faulty loom between hopper and Interface Board. B. Faulty hopper motor. Hopper motor running slowly. A. Hopper disc is binding. B. Motor spindle bent. C. Faulty hopper motor controller. COIN ACCEPTOR FAULT, COIN OPTIC FAULT message. A. Faulty loom between: the coin validator and Interface Board the comparator PCBA and the sensor assembly. B. Coins jammed in coin validator sensor assembly. Coins jamming in the diverter window. Coins continually rejected. Coin diverter jamming. A. Sample coin not in the correct location in the sensor assembly. B. Faulty comparator. ILLEGAL COIN OUT message on power-up. A. Dirty hopper photooptic detector/emitter. B. Faulty hopper.

2. Remove coin jam.

Adjust the position of the diverter. 1. Check that the sample coin is located firmly between the scanner unit and the fork of the rail insert. 2. Replace the comparator. 1. Clean the hopper photo-optic detector/emitter. 2. Run a hopper test (see Machine Modes) to check that the hopper motor stops when the correct number of coins have been ejected.

Revision 01

17-5

Machine Fault Finding

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Fault
All coins are going to the cash box and the hopper is empty.

Probable Cause
A. Hopper probe shorted to ground. B. Faulty coin diverter solenoid on the coin chute assembly. C. Coin diverter jamming.

Action
1. Clear the short.

2. Run a coin chuting test (see Machine Modes) to check that the solenoid has power. 3. Adjust the position of the coin diverter. Carefully clear the reject chute. 1. Check that the loom is correctly seated and has continuity.

Reject coins not falling into the coin tray. Coins accepted but not registered on the coin counter and the machine locks out.

Coins jammed in the reject chute. A. Faulty loom between the coin validator and the Interface Board. B. Faulty coin comparator.

2. Replace the comparator. Perform a memory reset (see Machine Modes).

3 WAY METERING ERROR message.

Corrupt data. Inconsistent data across all three electronic audit meter sets.

17-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Appendix A

Appendix A
Games
Spinning Reel Games........................................................................................ 3

Revision 01

A-1

Appendix A

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

List of Figures:
Figure A-1 MK V Video Game Screen Example.................................................................. 4 Figure A-2 MK V Pay Table Example ................................................................................. 5

A-2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Appendix A

Spinning Reel Games


The Jubilee Mk4/5XR gaming machine is available with MkV Spinning Reel games. The screen displays a simulation of the reels spinning, which, after a short time 'come to rest'. The resultant positions of the various symbols (refer to Fig A-1) is assessed for a winning combination. If the resultant combination is a winner (the winning combination(s) can be checked, if the machine has a top box, with the pay table provided on the top box artwork, if the machine has no top box, with the pay table provided on the belly panel artwork. Figure A-2 shows an example of a pay table), the machine responds by flashing the corresponding symbols and by emitting 'win' sounds. The game software displays the amount of credits won on the screen, prompts the player to gamble the win (if available), then adds them to the player's credit total. This action may vary slightly depending on the software, customer and legal requirements. The gamble features can vary considerably between games, however, the concept is the same. The player is given the opportunity to gamble the credits won for a chance to double the total. This 'doubling up' may continue for up to five times (or possibly more) consecutively. If the combination is not a winner, the machine will end the game if no credits are remaining or prompt the player to continue.

Revision 01

A-3

Appendix A

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

4 6 2 8 1 9 3 7 5
SCV018

K Q K Q

4 6 2 8 1 9

3 7 5

Figure A-1 MK V Video Game Screen Example

A-4

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Appendix A

Play up to 90 credits. Bet up to 10 credits per line.

Prince, K, Q, J, 10 & 9

1000 500 100 10 2 500 100 50 500 75 25 500 50 20 500 40 15 500 30 10 500 25 5 2

10000 5000 1000 100 20 5000 1000 500 5000 750 250 5000 500 200 5000 400 150 5000 300 100 5000 250 50 20

*
2
1000 50 10 4

3000 1500 300 30 6 1500 300 150 1500 225 75 1500 150 60 1500 120 45 1500 90 30 1500 75 15 6

5000 2500 500 50 10 2500 500 250 2500 375 125 2500 250 100 2500 200 75 2500 150 50 2500 125 25 10

2000 1000 200 20 4 1000 200 100 1000 150 50 1000 100 40 1000 80 30 1000 60 20 1000 50 10 4

Scattered Peacocks pay any.


Scattered wins are multiplied by total number of credits staked. To change bet per line, press the bet button of your choice. To start the game, press the payline button of your choice.

1
500 25 25 5 5 2 2
500

3
1500 75 15 6

5
2500 125 25 10

6
3000 150 30 12

7
3500 175 35 14

10
4500 225 45 18

14
5000 250 50 20

15
7000 350 70 28 7500 375 75 30

18

21
10500 525 105 42

25
12500 625 125 50

27
13500 675 135 54

30
15000 750 150 60

35
17500 875 175 70

45
22500 1125 225 90

50
25000 1250 250 100

70

90

9000 450 90 36

35000 45000 1750 2250 350 450 140 180

DOUBLE UP FEATURE
TOPBOX2

GAMBLE BUTTON FLASHING: DOUBLE UP FEATURE APPEARS AFTER WIN. PRESS IF NOT REQUIRED. GAMBLE BUTTON NOT FLASHING: AFTER WIN. PRESS GAMBLE BUTTON TO DOUBLE UP. PRESS RED OR BLACK. WIN IS DOUBLED IF YOUR CHOICE IS CORRECT. WINNINGS MAY BE GAMBLED UP TO 5 TIMES. MAXIMUM WIN PER GAMBLE IS $10,OOO.

EXTRA LINES

Figure A-2 MK V Pay Table Example

Revision 01

A-5

Appendix A

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Notes

A-6

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Glossary

Glossary
ADH Any pays ARM250 ASIC Audit key switch Audit meters Base game Base Bilock Aristocrat Disc Hopper. Symbols are read anywhere on the payline, and not necessarily left to right or right to left. Advanced RISC Machine - a type of integrated microcontroller Application Specific Integrated Circuit To display the electronic audit meters on the monitor, insert the audit key and turn it 90 clockwise. See electronic and electro-mechanical meters. The game provided with the EGM as described in the paytable and mid panel display. A specially designed box unit on which the cabinet stands. The cash box is usually located securely within the base. A range of high-security locks manufactured by the Australian Lock Company Pty. Ltd. that features a unique U shaped keyway. After the player presses the COLLECT button, the credits are manually paid out to a player and recorded in the payout book. The series of buttons across the front of the cabinet that the player uses to control game play. The major cabinet or casing in which the workings of the machine are housed. Metal channels used to route the power cables and communication cables to Slant Top machines. The channels also locate the machines. When a player attempts to COLLECT a credit amount greater than the amount that the Hopper can pay out, the machine locks up. When this occurs, the Cancel Credit procedure allows for the player to be paid manually and the credit on the machine cancelled to zero. The high security compartment used to hold any coins not held in the hopper. The value of coins removed from the cash box, usually daily. Complementary metal oxide semi-conductor. See photo-optic detectors.

Book pay

Button panel Cabinet Cable channel assembly

Cancel credit

Cash box Clearance CMOS Coin detectors

Revision 01

Glossary

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Coin jam Coin selector Coin tray Coin validator Collect cash

When coins jam in the coin assembly chute. See coin comparator. The tray at the bottom of the cabinet into which payout or reject coins are deposited for collection. Device that senses physical and magnetic properties of a coin tendered to determine if valid and acceptable for play. To convert the amount shown on the CREDIT meter to cash, the player presses the COLLECT button that activates the hopper to pay the coins into the coin tray. See base. Central processing unit. Coins inserted into the machine register as credits. One coin may equal more than one credit. Prizes are shown as credits until such time as the player chooses to collect them. Digital to analog Data Encryption System Data Storage Board Error Checking and Correction Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory Electronic Gaming Machine Electronic Hard Meter The electromechanical meters or counters. These meters are non-resettable and are cumulative for the life of the machine. The electronic audit meters that provide audit information. Electromagnetic Compatibility Erasable programmable read only memory. EHM SPI Board Additional game to the base game that provides variety and an additional means of winning. If the hopper runs out of coins, the operator opens the cabinet and places a specific number of coins into the hopper. The club, casino or organisation running the games. A link progressive jackpot feature. Input/output.

Console CPU Credit

D/A DES DSB ECC EEPROM EGM EHM Electromechanical meters Electronic meters EMC EPROM ESB Feature game Hopper refill

House Hyperlink I/O

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Glossary

IC Illegal coin Intelligent bezel Installation I/O Jackpot key switch

Integrated circuit A coin which is incorrectly paid out by the hopper. Sites the accept/reject slot for note placement on the bill acceptor fascia panel. A club, casino or other place which has a number of gaming machines. Input/output. To reset the machine after a cashier payout or after a machine fault has been corrected, insert the J key, turn it 180 clockwise and back again. New South Wales Liquor Administration Board. Light emitting diode. Symbols are read from left to right for prize determination. A series of machines are linked together by an external progressive controller. Each machine contributes to a common progressively incremented jackpot and is displayed separately for the player to see. A lockup renders the machine unplayable and is triggered either by a malfunction, when a jackpot has been won (if the program permits), or when the player has pressed the CASH OUT pushbutton when there is more than the cancel credit amount in credit. A book payment made for any amount in excess of the cancel credit limit of the machine. A button that automatically bets the maximum amount possible on a game. Electronic (soft) meters and electro-mechanical meters located within the machine that record and display important audit information for the operator. The computer component which controls and processes game play instructions. A game in which a player bets on additional lines to multiply the chance of a prize. A game in which a player bets additional coins on any one game to multiply the value of the prize. The line or lines which indicate where the symbols must line up for a player to win. Book used to record hopper refill amount, jackpot amount and cancel credit amount.

LAB LED Left to right pay Links

Lockup

Manual pay Max bet Meters

Microprocessor Multiline Multiplier Payline(s) Payout book

Revision 01

Glossary

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

PCBA Play button PLD Progressive jackpot

Printed circuit board assembly. One of the illuminated buttons on the button panel, used in game play. Programmable logic device. This is an additional jackpot to the game's normal jackpot. This jackpot increments by a fixed percentage of the machine's turnover and is displayed separately for the player to see. Programmable Read Only Memory. Quick Change Core a facility offered by Bilocks (see above) where the keyed core of the lock is fitted separate to the lock barrel. Money you add to a hopper by opening the door and inserting coins, usually when the machine has run out of coins. A button on the machine which allows a player to indicate to others that the machine is reserved. This reserve message remains lit for 3 minutes. Reduced Instruction Set Computer. Symbols can be above, below or on the payline to qualify for a prize. Subsidiary equipment function. Subsidiary equipment serial interface. The machine locks up when a coin jams across the hopper photo-optic detector for more than 0.5 seconds. See electronic meters. Serial Peripheral Interface Static Random Access Memory. The various designs on the reel strips. Common symbols include Jacks, Kings, Aces, Cherries, and Gold Bars. The box unit on top of the cabinet which carries the game graphics, rules and score card. A coin travelling in reverse to its normal direction. For example: a coin is dangled through and withdrawn from the coin entry slot of the machine in an attempt to cheat the machine of a coin during game play.

PROM QCC

Refill

Reserve

RISC Scattered pays SEF SESI Short time out Soft meters SPI SRAM Symbols Top box Yo-Yo

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Index

Index
A Accounting Information ............................. 3-16 ARM RISC ................................................ 11-4 ARM250 Microprocessor ........................ 11-10 Artwork main door .............................................. 4-13 top box .................................................. 4-20 Audit Key ..................................................... 4-9 B Ballast .............................................. 4-12, 4-22 Bank Note Acceptor Assembly .................... 7-3 assembly replacement ............................ 7-16 bank note acceptor .................................. 7-5 bezel ............................................ 7-10, 7-13 communications .................................... 7-10 configuration ......................................... 7-13 DIP switches ......................................... 7-13 dual-cage housing .................................... 7-4 electronics ............................................... 7-8 faults ...................................................... 7-13 GL5 serial interface ............................... 7-10 jams ....................................................... 7-16 LEDs ........................................... 7-10, 7-13 main board interface ............................ 11-22 maintenance ........................................... 7-20 microcontroller ........................................ 7-8 note entry ................................................. 7-7 physical description ................................. 7-3 scanning system ..................................... 7-10 security .......................................... 3-10, 7-7 stacker ........................................... 7-6, 7-10 stacker replacement ............................... 7-15 troubleshooting ...................................... 7-18 video level calibration ........................... 7-20 Bank Note Acceptor Information ............... 3-24 Battery Backup Circuit ............................ 11-16 Belly Panel artwork .................................................. 4-13 door ....................................................... 4-19 security .................................................. 4-20 Bezel ................................................ 7-10, 7-13 Bill Acceptor (see Bank Note Acceptor Assembly) ............................................... 7-3 Bilock Locks ...................................... 1-7, 4-10 BIPs ........................................................... 16-3 C Cabinet Door ............................................... 4-5 artwork .................................................. 4-13 latch ........................................................ 4-5 lock ......................................................... 4-7 photo-optic sensor .................................. 4-8 security ................................................... 4-7 Cabinet maintenance ................................. 4-23 Cash Box ................................................... 4-11 Cash Box Chute ......................................... 4-11 Cashcade Jackpots ..................................... 16-3 Cashless Transfer ...................................... 16-6 Cathode Ray Tube ....................................... 9-3 CCB ........................................................... 14-3 CCCE ........................................................ 15-6 CDS Display .............................................. 16-7 Coin Entry Test ......................................... 3-26 Coin Handling ............................................. 6-3 I/O driver board interface ..................... 13-7 main board interface ........................... 11-20 maintenance .......................................... 6-11 Coin Tray .................................................. 4-19 Coin Validator ............................................. 6-4 conector pinouts ...................................... 6-8 diverter solenoid ..................................... 6-9 fault finding .......................................... 6-11 photo-optic sensor .................................. 6-9 replacement ............................................. 6-7 security ................................................... 3-9 yoyo ........................................................ 6-6 Collect Limit ................................................ 3-6 Combination Test ...................................... 3-29 Communications Configuration Board 11-22, 14-3 configuration ......................................... 14-4 connector pin assignments .................... 14-7 functional description ........................... 14-4 maintenance .......................................... 14-7

Revision 01

Index 1

Index

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

removal ................................................. 14-6 CPU ......................................................... 11-10 CRT ............................................................. 9-3 Current Lockup Menu ................................ 3-33 D Debug Port ............................................... 11-13 Debugging ................................................ 11-13 Degaussing ................................................... 9-7 DEMON ................................................... 11-13 Diagnostic Information .............................. 3-21 Diagnostic LEDs ...................................... 11-10 Diverter Solenoid ......................................... 6-9 Door security .............................................. 3-10 DRAM ..................................................... 11-15 Dual-cage housing ........................................ 7-4 E EEPROMS ............................................... 11-16 Electromechanical Meter Board connector pin assignment ...................... 10-8 functional description ............................ 10-4 general description ................................ 10-3 light tower interface .............................. 10-5 maintenance ......................................... 10-10 meter detection ...................................... 10-5 meter drive outputs ................................ 10-5 overcurrent protection ........................... 10-5 PCB expansion ...................................... 10-5 replacement ........................................... 10-7 security interface ................................... 10-5 serial interface ....................................... 10-4 Electromechanical Meters .......................... 3-11 security .................................................. 3-13 Electronic Meters ....................................... 3-13 EPROM ................................................... 11-15 Error Log Display ...................................... 3-23 External I/O Expansion ............................ 11-14 F Factory Test ............................................... 3-28 Fault Finding .............................................. 17-3 fault mode .................................................. 3-11 Fault Mode ................................................. 3-33 FIP ............................................................. 14-4 Fluorescent Lighting cabinet door ........................................... 4-12 power ..................................................... 5-10

top box .................................................. 4-20 Fuses .......................................................... 5-11 G Gamble Feature ........................................... 3-5 Gamble Statistics ....................................... 3-21 Game Display .............................................. 3-4 Game Display Shelf ................................... 4-12 Game Replay ............................................. 3-19 Game Statistics .......................................... 3-20 Games multiline .................................................. 3-6 multiplier ................................................ 3-6 GL5 Serial Interface .................................. 7-10 H Hopper ......................................................... 8-3 basic operation ........................................ 8-6 coin dispensing ....................................... 8-7 coin jamming prevention ........................ 8-7 disassembly ........................................... 8-10 fault finding .......................................... 8-12 full detection ........................................... 8-7 interface signals ...................................... 8-7 main board interface ........................... 11-21 maintenance .......................................... 8-13 parts ........................................................ 8-4 probe ....................................................... 8-7 refill ........................................................ 2-8 replacement ............................................. 8-8 security ................................................. 3-10 test ........................................................ 3-26 I I/O Data Bus ............................................ 11-10 I/O Driver Board coin handling interface ......................... 13-7 connector pin assignment .................... 13-11 EMI protection ..................................... 13-6 functional description ........................... 13-3 LEDs ..................................................... 13-9 physical description .............................. 13-3 power supply ......................................... 13-6 pushbuttons and lamps .......................... 13-6 replacement ......................................... 13-10 Inrush Current Scenario ............................... 5-9 Installation ................................................... 2-5 pre-installation requirements .................. 2-3

Index 2

Revision 01

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Index

Interface Board ............................................ 1-4 connectors ............................................. 12-7 physical description ............................... 12-3 replacement ......................................... 12-18 technical description .............................. 12-5 J Jackpot Reset Key ........................................ 4-9 Jurisdictional Meters .................................. 3-17 K Key Switches ............................................... 4-9 Keyboard Port .......................................... 11-13 Keys ............................................................. 1-6 L LAB Communications Board .............. 1-4, 15-3 basic operation ...................................... 15-6 connector pin assignments ................... 15-11 fuses ...................................................... 15-8 maintenance ......................................... 15-13 physical description ............................... 15-3 PSU ....................................................... 15-7 replacement ......................................... 15-10 Lamp Test .................................................. 3-25 Latch Bar ..................................................... 4-5 Layout Setup .............................................. 3-33 LEDs bank note acceptor assembly ....... 7-10, 7-13 I/O driver board ..................................... 13-9 main boad ............................................ 11-10 Light Tower Interface ................................ 10-5 Locks .................................................. 1-7, 4-10 cabinet door ............................................. 4-7 Lockup ....................................................... 1-10 Lockup Menu ............................................. 3-33 Logic Cage ................................................. 4-11 Low-Power Mode Signal ............................. 5-9 M Machine basic operation ........................................ 1-8 components ............................................. 4-3 description ............................................... 4-3 dimensions .............................................. 2-4 identification ......................................... 3-16 maintenance ........................................... 4-23 modes ...................................................... 3-3

physical description ................................ 1-3 setup ...................................................... 3-30 technical description ............................... 4-5 Machine Lockup ........................................ 1-10 Main Board ................................................ 11-4 architecture ........................................... 11-6 connector description .......................... 11-24 functional description ........................... 11-6 interface board connection .................. 11-22 physical description .............................. 11-5 power control interface ....................... 11-17 replacement ......................................... 11-23 serial channels ..................................... 11-21 technical description ............................. 11-8 Mains Cable Clamp ..................................... 2-7 Mains Switch ............................................... 5-3 Mechanical Switches ............................... 11-19 security ............................................... 11-20 Memory ................................................... 11-15 Meters security ................................................. 3-13 Meters SRAM ......................................... 11-15 Mid Trim Panel ......................................... 4-14 Mikohn CON2 ......................... 16-3, 16-5, 16-6 Mikohn Interface ............................ 11-14, 16-8 Modes .......................................................... 3-3 Monitor.......................................................... 9-3 degaussing ....................................... 1-4, 9-7 display .................................................... 3-7 general description .................................. 9-3 maintenance ............................................ 9-6 picture adjustment ................................... 9-4 power supply ........................................... 9-4 replacement ............................................. 9-6 Monitor Mask ............................................ 4-18 Mystery Cashcade Jackpot Light ............... 16-5 Mystery Cashcade Jackpots ....................... 16-3 O Operator Mode ................................. 1-10, 3-14 Operator Setup / Selections Menu ............. 3-30 Optical Security ................................ 4-7, 11-19 Overcurrent Protection ................................ 5-8 Overvoltage Protection ................................ 5-8 P Panic Log Display ..................................... 3-23 Periodic Meters ......................................... 3-18

Revision 01

Index 3

Index

NSW MK4/5XR Video Service Manual

Photo-optic Sensor ............................... 4-8, 6-9 Play Mode ............................................ 1-8, 3-4 Playbuttons ................................................. 4-14 Power Fail Signal ......................................... 5-9 Power Save Mode ...................................... 3-33 Power Supply ............................................... 5-3 basic operation ........................................ 5-5 fuses ...................................................... 5-11 inrush current scenario ............................ 5-9 low-power mode signal ........................... 5-9 maintenance ........................................... 5-12 output requirements ................................. 5-7 overcurrent protection ............................. 5-8 overvoltage protection ............................. 5-8 physical connections ............................... 5-9 power fail signal ...................................... 5-9 replacement ........................................... 5-11 PSU Chassis ....................................... 1-4, 15-7 Pushbuttons .................................................. 3-8 R Real Time Clock ...................................... 11-16 setup ...................................................... 3-32 Record Refill ................................................ 2-9 Reel Spin Speed Setup ............................... 3-32 Reserve Button ............................................. 3-6 Reset Signal ............................................. 11-12 RISC ............................................................ 1-3 S Security ................................... 3-9, 3-11, 11-19 bank note acceptor assembly ......... 3-10, 7-7 cabinet door ............................................. 4-7 coin validator .......................................... 3-9 door ....................................................... 3-10 electromechanical meters ...................... 3-13 hopper ................................................... 3-10

mechanical switches ........................... 11-20 optical ................................................. 11-19 SEF .......................................... 15-3, 15-4, 15-6 SEI ............................................................. 16-3 Self Test Mode .......................................... 3-24 Self-test ........................................................ 3-8 SESI .......................................................... 15-6 Soft Meters (see Electronic Meters) .......... 3-13 Sound ....................................................... 11-11 Sound Effects Test ..................................... 3-28 Sound System Setup .................................. 3-32 Sounds ......................................................... 3-8 SPI Bus .................................................... 11-18 Spinning Reel Games .................................. 3-5 Stacker ......................................................... 7-6 Subsidiary Equipment Interface ................ 16-3 T Top Box ..................................................... 4-20 artwork .................................................. 4-20 fluorescent lighting ............................... 4-20 Top Trim Panel ......................................... 4-17 Tunes ........................................................... 3-8 V VACS .......................................................... 6-5 Video Controller ............................... 9-3, 11-12 Video Monitor (see Monitor) Video Monitor Test ................................... 3-27 Voltage Selector Switch .............................. 2-7 W Watchdog Timer ...................................... 11-13 Y Yoyo .......................................................... 17-4

Index 4

Revision 01

You might also like